WFC 5810

WF-C5810/WF-C5890 User's Guide
Contents
WF-C5810/WF-C5890 User's Guide.......................................................................................................... 17
Product Basics .......................................................................................................................................... 18
Installing or Using Optional Parts ....................................................................................................... 18
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts .............................................................................. 18
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units ................................................................................. 19
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows................................................................... 26
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows..................... 27
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac .......................................................................... 30
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Mac............................. 31
Product Parts Locations ..................................................................................................................... 32
Product Parts - Front ..................................................................................................................... 33
Product Parts - Inside .................................................................................................................... 35
Product Parts - Back...................................................................................................................... 37
Using the Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 38
Control Panel Buttons and Lights .................................................................................................. 38
Status Icon Information ............................................................................................................. 39
Selecting the Date and Time ......................................................................................................... 40
Selecting Your Country or Region ................................................................................................. 41
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen ....................................................................................... 42
Using Presets ................................................................................................................................ 43
Changing LCD Screen Language.................................................................................................. 43
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds .................................................................................................... 44
Adjusting the Screen Brightness.................................................................................................... 44
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting .................................................................................. 45
Checking for Software Updates.......................................................................................................... 45
Using Power Saving Settings ............................................................................................................. 46
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings ............................................................................................... 46
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings ........................................................................................ 47
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More ......................................................... 47
Setting Up Epson Connect Services.............................................................................................. 48
3
Using Epson Email Print ............................................................................................................... 48
Using Epson Remote Print ........................................................................................................... 49
Using Epson Scan to Cloud........................................................................................................... 50
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App.......................................................................................... 50
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 51
Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook ................................................................................................ 52
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler ................................................................................ 52
Using the Mopria Print Service .......................................................................................................... 53
Voice-activated Printing ..................................................................................................................... 53
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking........................................................................................................................ 55
Network Security Recommendations ................................................................................................. 55
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup......................................................................................................... 56
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel ........................................................ 57
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup .................................................................................................................... 59
Connecting to a Mobile Device ...................................................................................................... 60
Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password ................................................................ 61
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)............................................................................................................. 62
Using WPS to Connect to a Network ............................................................................................. 62
Printing a Network Status Sheet......................................................................................................... 63
Printing a Network Connection Report ............................................................................................... 64
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages ....................................................................... 65
Configuring Email Server Settings...................................................................................................... 70
Email Server Settings .................................................................................................................... 71
Changing or Updating Network Connections ..................................................................................... 72
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection...................................................................... 72
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection...................................................... 72
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router ................................................................................................ 73
Disabling Wi-Fi Features ............................................................................................................... 74
Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing ....................................................................................................... 75
Installing the PCL Driver - Windows .................................................................................................. 75
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ............................................................... 77
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac ....................................................................... 77
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings ....................................................................... 78
4
PDL Print Configuration Options.................................................................................................... 78
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings ............................................................................ 81
Printing Language and Interface Options ...................................................................................... 81
Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet ............................................................................... 82
Loading Paper ........................................................................................................................................... 83
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray............................................................. 83
Paper Loading Capacity ..................................................................................................................... 86
Double-sided Printing Capacity .......................................................................................................... 91
Compatible Epson Papers.................................................................................................................. 94
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software.............................................................................. 96
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel ........................................................... 97
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel ............................................................................................. 97
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator................................................................................ 98
Selecting the Default Printer Settings ............................................................................................ 98
Paper Source Settings Options................................................................................................. 99
Selecting the Universal Print Settings.......................................................................................... 100
Universal Print Settings Options ............................................................................................. 101
Placing Originals on the Product ........................................................................................................... 102
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder ...................................................................... 103
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass ........................................................................................... 104
Copying .................................................................................................................................................... 106
Copying Documents or Photos......................................................................................................... 106
Copying Options............................................................................................................................... 107
Printing from a Computer ....................................................................................................................... 111
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows ......................................................... 111
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows .................................................................................... 112
Paper Source Options - Windows ........................................................................................... 115
Print Quality Options - Windows ............................................................................................. 115
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows................................................................................... 115
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows ................................................................... 116
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows............................................................................... 119
Print Density Adjustments - Windows ..................................................................................... 119
5
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows ........................................................... 119
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows.......................................................................... 122
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows.................................................................. 123
Header/Footer Settings - Windows ......................................................................................... 124
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows......................................................................................... 126
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows ...................................................................................... 127
Extended Settings - Windows ................................................................................................. 129
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows............................................................................... 131
Locking Printer Settings - Windows ............................................................................................. 132
Locked Setting Options........................................................................................................... 133
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing ............................................................................. 135
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows.................................................................................. 136
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens ....................................................... 137
Changing Automatic Update Options .......................................................................................... 138
Printing with the Built-in Epson Driver - Windows 10 S..................................................................... 139
Selecting Print Settings - Windows 10 S...................................................................................... 140
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac ................................................................. 143
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac ........................................................................................... 144
Paper Source Options - Mac ................................................................................................... 147
Print Quality Options - Mac ..................................................................................................... 148
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac .......................................................................................... 148
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac........................................................................................... 149
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac........................................................................... 150
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac ........................................................... 152
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac .......................................................................................... 152
Printing Preferences - Mac...................................................................................................... 153
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac ...................................................................................... 154
Checking Print Status - Mac.................................................................................................... 154
Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook .............................................................................................. 155
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet............................................................................................... 156
Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows............................................................................ 156
Synchronizing Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows .............................................................. 156
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows................................................................ 158
6
Selecting Default Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows ............................................................. 160
Locking Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows......................................................................... 161
PCL Driver Locked Setting Options ........................................................................................ 163
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ........................................................ 164
Selecting Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows ................................................ 164
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows.................................... 167
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac ................................................................ 168
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac ............................................. 169
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button...................................................................................... 173
Scanning .................................................................................................................................................. 174
Starting a Scan................................................................................................................................. 174
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel ........................................................................ 174
Scanning to Email ................................................................................................................... 175
Scanning to a Connected Computer ....................................................................................... 177
Scanning to a Memory Device ................................................................................................ 178
Scanning to the Cloud............................................................................................................. 178
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7/Windows Vista) .............................................................. 179
Control Panel Scanning Options ............................................................................................. 180
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server...................................................... 182
Creating a Shared Network Folder.......................................................................................... 182
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config ............................... 184
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel ........................... 185
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server.......................................................................... 186
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon ............................................................................. 188
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program................................................................................... 190
Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet.............................................................................. 192
Scanning in Epson Scan 2 ............................................................................................................... 192
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab ....................................................................... 195
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab ............................................................... 196
Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2 ................................... 197
Image Format Options................................................................................................................. 199
Scan Resolution Guidelines ........................................................................................................ 199
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture .......................................................... 200
7
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows .............................................. 200
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows.................................................... 202
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows ............................. 203
Scanning Two Originals onto One Sheet (Stitching Images) - Windows ..................................... 206
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows ...................................................... 209
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac ..................................................................................... 212
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac............................................ 215
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning ............................................................................... 216
Faxing....................................................................................................................................................... 217
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine .............................................................................. 217
Setting Up Fax Features .................................................................................................................. 222
Setting Up Basic Fax Features .................................................................................................... 222
Using the Fax Setup Wizard ................................................................................................... 222
Selecting the Line Type........................................................................................................... 224
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer .................................................................................. 225
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings ................................................................................................ 226
Basic Settings - Fax ................................................................................................................ 227
Send Settings - Fax................................................................................................................. 230
Receive Settings - Fax ............................................................................................................ 230
Report Settings - Fax .............................................................................................................. 233
Security Settings - Fax ............................................................................................................ 234
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows............................................................................................ 235
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac ................................................................... 237
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups......................................................................................... 238
Creating a Contact....................................................................................................................... 239
Editing or Deleting a Contact ....................................................................................................... 240
Creating a Contact Group............................................................................................................ 240
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group ............................................................................................ 241
Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................................. 242
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel........................................................................... 242
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History ...................................................... 242
Fax Sending Options .............................................................................................................. 244
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time ......................................................................................... 246
8
Sending a Fax on Demand ..................................................................................................... 247
Sending a Stored Fax ............................................................................................................. 248
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone ............................................................... 249
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows .......................................................................... 250
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac .................................................................................. 253
Receiving Faxes............................................................................................................................... 255
Fax Reception ............................................................................................................................. 255
Receiving Faxes Automatically ................................................................................................... 256
Receiving Faxes Manually........................................................................................................... 256
Forwarding Received Faxes........................................................................................................ 257
Receiving a Fax by Polling .......................................................................................................... 258
Checking Fax Status ....................................................................................................................... 258
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box) ................................................................... 259
Printing Fax Reports......................................................................................................................... 259
Fax Report Options ..................................................................................................................... 260
Using External USB Devices with Your Product................................................................................... 261
Connecting a USB Device ................................................................................................................ 261
Disconnecting a USB Device............................................................................................................ 262
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen ...................................................................................... 262
Printing JPEG Photos.................................................................................................................. 262
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode......................................................................................... 263
Printing TIFF and PDF Files ....................................................................................................... 264
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode........................................................................................... 265
Print Setting Options - PDF Mode ........................................................................................... 266
Transferring Files on a USB Device ................................................................................................. 267
Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers from Your Computer................................................... 267
Transferring Files from a USB Device to Your Computer ............................................................ 268
Replacing Ink Supply Units (Ink Packs), Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers ........................ 270
Ink Pack Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 270
Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status........................................................................................... 271
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen...................................................................................... 272
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Windows................................................................ 272
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Mac ....................................................................... 274
9
Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes ....................................................................... 275
Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack) and Maintenance Box Part Numbers ................................................ 276
Removing and Installing Ink Packs................................................................................................... 276
Replacing the Maintenance Box....................................................................................................... 277
Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers ................................................................................................... 278
Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen ............................................................................. 279
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Ink Packs .................................................................... 279
Printing with Expended Color Ink Packs - Windows .................................................................... 280
Printing with Expended Color Ink Packs - Mac ............................................................................ 280
Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows ......................................................................................... 282
Adjusting Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 284
Print Head Maintenance................................................................................................................... 284
Print Head Nozzle Check............................................................................................................. 284
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel ......................................................... 284
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility ...................................................................... 286
Print Head Cleaning .................................................................................................................... 288
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ...................................................... 289
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility................................................................... 290
Print Head Alignment ....................................................................................................................... 292
Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ............................................................ 293
Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel........................................................ 293
Cleaning the Paper Guide ................................................................................................................ 294
Cleaning the Translucent Film.......................................................................................................... 295
Checking the Number of Sheets on the LCD Screen ....................................................................... 297
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................. 299
Cleaning Your Product ..................................................................................................................... 299
Cleaning the Scanner Glass............................................................................................................. 300
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder....................................................................................... 301
Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................................... 304
Administering Your Product................................................................................................................... 311
Accessing the Web Config Utility...................................................................................................... 311
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config ...................................................................... 313
Configuring Product Settings............................................................................................................ 313
10
Checking Status Information ....................................................................................................... 314
Managing the Network Connection.............................................................................................. 315
Network Settings..................................................................................................................... 315
Setting Control Panel Options ..................................................................................................... 320
Sending Email Notifications......................................................................................................... 320
Adjusting Power Saving Settings................................................................................................. 321
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds .................................................................................................. 321
Importing and Exporting Product Settings ................................................................................... 322
Exporting Settings Using Web Config ..................................................................................... 322
Importing Settings Using Web Config ..................................................................................... 323
Updating Firmware Using Web Config ........................................................................................ 323
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server ................................................................. 323
Clearing the Internal Memory ...................................................................................................... 324
Adjusting the Contact List View Options ...................................................................................... 324
Enabling Periodic Cleaning ......................................................................................................... 325
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely ....................................................................... 325
Restoring Default Product Settings.............................................................................................. 326
Configuring Security Settings ........................................................................................................... 326
Connecting an Authentication Device.......................................................................................... 327
Restricting Features Available for Users ..................................................................................... 328
User Feature Restriction ......................................................................................................... 328
Configuring User Feature Restrictions .................................................................................... 329
Disabling the External Interface................................................................................................... 330
Setting Up Password Encryption ................................................................................................. 330
Working with Audit Logs .............................................................................................................. 331
Restricting PDL File Operations .................................................................................................. 331
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up .................................................................................. 331
Restricting Domain Access.......................................................................................................... 331
Using Your Product on a Secure Network ........................................................................................ 332
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config ..................................................................... 332
Protocol Settings..................................................................................................................... 333
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication......................................................................................... 337
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings ................................................................................................ 337
11
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product...................................................................... 338
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering ...................................................................................................... 338
About IPsec/IP Filtering .......................................................................................................... 338
Configuring Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy........................................................................... 339
Configuring Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies ......................................................................... 339
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings ............................................................................................ 340
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples.............................................................................. 344
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate ........................................................................... 345
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network ................................................................... 346
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network ..................................................................................... 346
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings ............................................................................................... 347
Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network ............................................................ 347
IEEE 802.1X Network Status .................................................................................................. 348
Using a Digital Certificate ............................................................................................................ 348
About Digital Certification........................................................................................................ 349
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate .................................................................... 349
CSR Setup Settings ................................................................................................................ 350
CSR Import Settings ............................................................................................................... 351
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate ............................................................................................. 352
Updating a Self-signed Certificate........................................................................................... 352
Importing a CA Certificate ....................................................................................................... 353
Deleting a CA Certificate......................................................................................................... 353
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft) .............................................................................................. 354
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software......................................................................... 354
Solving Problems .................................................................................................................................... 355
Viewing the Help Screen .................................................................................................................. 355
Product Status Messages ................................................................................................................ 356
Job Status Error Codes .................................................................................................................... 359
Running a Product Check ................................................................................................................ 363
Resetting Control Panel Defaults ..................................................................................................... 364
Solving Setup Problems ................................................................................................................... 365
Product Does Not Turn On or Off................................................................................................. 366
Noise After Ink Installation ........................................................................................................... 366
12
Software Installation Problems .................................................................................................... 366
Cannot Read the Authentication Card ......................................................................................... 367
Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 367
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point .................................................. 368
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network................................................................. 369
Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac ................................................................... 370
USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable.................................................. 370
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window ....................................................................... 371
Cannot Print Over a Network....................................................................................................... 371
Cannot Scan Over a Network ...................................................................................................... 373
Solving Network Security Problems ................................................................................................. 374
Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port................................................................................ 374
Cannot Update a Certificate or Create a CSR ............................................................................. 374
Cannot Import a Digital Certificate ............................................................................................... 375
Deleted a CA-signed Certificate .................................................................................................. 375
Digital Certificate Warning Messages.......................................................................................... 375
Solving Copying Problems ............................................................................................................... 377
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies.................................................................................. 377
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While............................................................................. 378
Solving Copy Quality Problems ........................................................................................................ 378
Copies Have Incorrect or Faint Colors......................................................................................... 378
Position, Size, or Margins of Copies are Incorrect ....................................................................... 379
Solving Paper Problems................................................................................................................... 379
Paper Feeding Problems............................................................................................................. 380
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder.................................................... 381
Paper Jams Inside the Product.................................................................................................... 382
Paper Ejection Problems ............................................................................................................. 382
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer..................................................................................... 382
Nothing Prints .............................................................................................................................. 383
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar ................................................................... 384
Printing is Slow ............................................................................................................................ 385
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems .................................................................................... 387
Inverted Image............................................................................................................................. 387
13
Too Many Copies Print ................................................................................................................ 388
Blank Pages Print ........................................................................................................................ 388
Incorrect Margins on Printout....................................................................................................... 388
Incorrect Characters Print............................................................................................................ 389
Incorrect Image Size or Position .................................................................................................. 390
Slanted Printout ........................................................................................................................... 390
Solving Print Quality Problems ......................................................................................................... 391
White or Dark Lines in Printout .................................................................................................... 392
Blurry or Smeared Printout .......................................................................................................... 392
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps ............................................................................................. 394
Grainy Printout............................................................................................................................. 395
Incorrect Colors ........................................................................................................................... 396
Solving Scanning Problems ............................................................................................................. 397
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly ......................................................................... 397
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2 ......................................................................................................... 397
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems ....................................................................................... 398
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only............................................................................................. 399
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images............................................................................... 399
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked ................................................................................ 400
Scanned Image Quality Problems ............................................................................................... 400
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges ........................................................................................ 402
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image ............................................................................................ 402
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped ........................................................................................... 402
Solving Faxing Problems.................................................................................................................. 402
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes ................................................................................................... 403
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product ........................................ 405
Fax Memory Full Error Appears................................................................................................... 406
Fax Quality is Poor ...................................................................................................................... 407
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size ................................................................................... 408
Received Fax is Not Printed ........................................................................................................ 408
Solving USB Device Problems ......................................................................................................... 408
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device..................................................................................... 409
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device ........................................................................................... 409
14
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device......................................................................... 410
Uninstall Your Product Software....................................................................................................... 410
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows .................................................................................... 411
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac............................................................................................ 412
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada) ............................................................................................. 412
Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 414
Windows System Requirements ...................................................................................................... 414
Mac System Requirements .............................................................................................................. 415
Paper Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 416
Printable Area Specifications ........................................................................................................... 417
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications .......................................................................... 418
Scanning Specifications ................................................................................................................... 419
Fax Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 420
Ink Pack Specifications .................................................................................................................... 421
Dimension Specifications ................................................................................................................. 422
Electrical Specifications ................................................................................................................... 423
Environmental Specifications ........................................................................................................... 423
Interface Specifications .................................................................................................................... 424
External USB Device Specifications................................................................................................. 424
Network Interface Specifications ...................................................................................................... 425
Safety and Approvals Specifications ................................................................................................ 428
Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 429
Important Safety Instructions............................................................................................................ 429
General Printer Safety Instructions.............................................................................................. 429
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions ..................................................................................... 431
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions ................................................................................... 431
LCD Screen Safety Instructions................................................................................................... 432
FCC Compliance Statement............................................................................................................. 432
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver ............................................................................................... 433
Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................... 436
Copyright Notice............................................................................................................................... 437
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment.............................................................................................. 437
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials................................................... 438
15
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products ............................................... 438
Copyright Attribution .................................................................................................................... 438
16
WF-C5810/WF-C5890 User's Guide
Welcome to the WF-C5810/WF-C5890 User's Guide.
For a printable PDF copy of this guide, click here.
Note: Availability of products in this guide varies by country.
17
Product Basics
See these sections to learn about the basic features of your product.
Note: Printing software instructions in this manual are intended for use with the standard Epson printer
software. For more information on using the Printer Command Language (PCL) or PostScript (PS3)
printer software, please see the appropriate sections (WF-C5890).
Installing or Using Optional Parts

Product Parts Locations
Using the Control Panel
Checking for Software Updates
Using Power Saving Settings
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Using AirPrint
Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler
Using the Mopria Print Service
Voice-activated Printing
Installing or Using Optional Parts

Follow the instructions in this section to install or use optional parts.
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Parent topic: Product Basics
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts

You can purchase genuine Epson accessories at epson.com (U.S. sales), epson.ca (Canadian sales), or
latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized
reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in
Canada.
U.S. and Canada
18
Option or part Part number
Replacement maintenance box C12C938211
Optional input tray C12C937901
Paper Feed Roller for Cassette A (C1) C12C938261
Paper Feed Roller for Cassette B (C2-C4) C12C938281
Low Optional Cabinet C12CFM7066
Medium Optional Cabinet C12CFM7067
Tall Optional Cabinet C12CFM7068
Latin America
Option or part Part number

Replacement maintenance box C12C938211
Optional input tray C12C937901
Paper Feed Roller for Cassette A (C1) C12C938261
Paper Feed Roller for Cassette B (C2-C4) C12C938281
Parent topic: Installing or Using Optional Parts

You can install up to three optional paper cassette units to provide more paper capacity.
1. Turn off the product, and unplug the power cord and any connected cables.
Warning: To avoid electric shock, make sure you unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the paper cassette unit from its packaging and remove any protective materials.
19
3. Make sure you have all the items shown here. You will also need a screwdriver to attach the paper
cassette unit, and two people to lift the printer.
4. Remove the protective piece from the back of the printer.
Note: Do not throw the piece away; you will use it later.
5. Place the first optional paper cassette unit in the location where you want to set up the printer.
20
6. If you are installing more than one optional paper cassette unit, stack them on top of each other and
secure them with the included screws.
21
7. Repeat this step for all paper cassette units.
22
8. Lift up your product and gently lower it onto the paper cassette unit with the corners aligned. Secure
the product to the paper cassette unit using the included screws.
Caution: Because the product is heavy, two or more people should lift and carry it using the hand
positions shown:
23
9. Secure the printer and paper cassette units at the back and right side using the included screws as
shown.
10. Re-insert the part you removed earlier into the back of the lowest paper cassette unit.
24
11. Place the correct sticker on each cassette unit to indicate the cassette number.
12. Connect the power cord and other connection cables, then plug in the product.
13. Turn on the product.
14. Press the Paper Setting button and make sure the installed cassette units are displayed on the
screen.
15. Enable the optional paper cassette units in the printer software.
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Parent topic: Installing or Using Optional Parts
Related references
Product Status Messages
Related tasks
Synchronizing Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows
Transporting Your Product
25
You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software.
Note: If you are using the PCL driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software, see the link below to enable
the optional cassette units.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name, then select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your printer name and select
Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click your printer name and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
26
You see a window like this:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get.

The optional paper sources are listed in the Current Printer Information section.
4. Click OK.
The optional paper cassettes are now enabled.
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Related references
Paper Feeding Problems
Related tasks
If you installed optional paper cassette units, you need to enable the optional cassette units before you
can use them with the PS3 printer software.
27
& scanners. Select your product name, then select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners . Select your
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select
Printer Properties.
then right-click your product name, and select Properties.
2. Click the Device Settings tab.
28
3. Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting.
4. Click OK.
Related references
Related tasks
29
You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software.
Note: If you are using the PostScript (PS3) printer software, see the link below to enable the optional
cassette units.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences.

2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Driver or Options.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select the number of cassette units installed as the Lower Cassette setting.
5. Click OK.
Related references
30
Related tasks
If you installed optional paper cassette units, you need to enable the optional cassette units before you
can use them with the PS3 printer software.
& Supplies.
4. Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting.
5. Click OK.
31
Related references
Related tasks
Product Parts Locations

See these sections to identify the parts on your product.
Product Parts - Front
Product Parts - Inside
Product Parts - Back
32
Product Parts - Front
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, you
can use these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) cover (F)

2 ADF edge guides
3 ADF input tray
4 ADF output tray
5 Control panel
6 Paper cassette 1 (C1)
7 Optional paper cassette 2 (C2)
33
10 External interface USB port
1 Paper tray cover

2 Edge guides
3 Paper support
4 Paper tray (B)
5 Output tray
34
6 Edge guides
7 Paper cassette
Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Product Parts - Inside

Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use
these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 Document cover
35
2 Scanner glass
1 Scanner unit (J)

2 Print head
3 Ink tray
4 Ink cover (A)
36
5 Cover lock
Product Parts - Back

Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use
these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 LAN port
2 USB port
3 Service USB port (do not remove sticker)
4 LINE port
5 EXT. port
6 AC inlet
7 Rear cover (D)
37
8 Rear cover (E)
9 Maintenance box cover (H)
Using the Control Panel

See these sections to learn about the control panel and select control panel settings.
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Selecting the Date and Time
Selecting Your Country or Region
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Using Presets
Changing LCD Screen Language
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
38
1 The power button and light
2 The LCD screen
3 The log out button
4 The Interrupt button
5 The Reset button
6 The Contacts button
7 The C clear button
8 The numeric keypad
9 The Job/Status button, the Error light, and the Data light
10 The Paper Setting button
11 The stop button
12 The help button
13 back button
14 The home button
15 Received Fax light
Status Icon Information

Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Your product displays status icons on the LCD screen for certain product status conditions. Press the
icon to view or change the current network settings.
Icons Description
Displays additional information or instructions, such as loading paper or placing a
document.
Quiet Mode is enabled. Noise is reduced during printing, but the print speed may be
reduced. Press this icon to change the settings.
Quiet Mode is disabled. Press this icon to change the settings.
39
Icons Description
The Mute setting is enabled. The printer does not make any sound when you press buttons
on the control panel.
Displays the Fax Data Information screen.
Press this icon to enable sleep mode and turn off the LCD screen.
The indicated setting has changed.
No Ethernet connection.
An Ethernet connection is established.
No Wi-Fi connection.
A Wi-Fi network error has occurred or the product is searching for a connection.
A Wi-Fi connection is established. The number of bars indicates the connection's signal
strength.
No Wi-Fi Direct connection.
A Wi-Fi Direct connection is established.
Access to the product's functions are restricted to authorized users. Press the icon to log in
to the printer using a user name and password. Contact your administrator if you do not
know the login information.
Access to the product's functions are restricted to authorized users and a user is currently
logged in. Press the icon to log out of the current user account.
Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights

Related tasks
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
Connecting to a Mobile Device

Before using your product, select the current date, time, and daylight saving phase in your area, and
choose your preferred date and time format.
40
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings.
3. Select Daylight Saving Time.
4. Select the setting that applies to your area:
• Winter: it is winter or your region does not use Daylight Saving Time (DST)
• Summer: it is spring or summer and your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Note: If your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST), you must change this setting to match the
season. When you change from Winter to Summer, your product automatically sets its clock ahead
one hour. When you change from Summer to Winter, it sets its clock back one hour.
5. Select Date/Time.
6. Select the date format you want to use.
7. Use the numeric keypad to enter the current date and select OK.
8. Select the time format you want to use.
9. Use the numeric keypad to enter the current time and select OK.
Related references
Basic Settings - Fax
Digital Certificate Warning Messages
Related tasks
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time
Selecting Your Country or Region

Before using your product, select the country or region in which you are using your product.
Note: If you change the country or region, your fax settings return to their defaults and you must select
them again. This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
41
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Country/Region.
3. Scroll up or down, if necessary, and select your country or region.
You see a confirmation screen.
4. If the setting is correct, select Yes. (If not, select No and retry.)

Follow these guidelines to enter characters for passwords and other settings.
• To move the cursor, select the left or right arrows.
• To change the case of letters, select .
• To delete the previous character, select .
• To enter numbers or symbols, select .

• To enter a space, select Space.
42
Related tasks
Using Presets
You can save frequently used copy, fax, and scan settings as presets. This lets you easily reuse them
whenever necessary.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change presets, contact your
administrator for assistance.

2. Select Presets.
3. Select Add New. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
Note: You can save up to 50 presets.
4. Select the function for which you want to set up a preset.

5. Select the settings you want to save and select Register.
6. Select Name.
7. Use the displayed keyboard to enter a name for the preset and select OK.
8. Select OK to return to the Presets screen.
When you copy, fax, or scan, you can use the preset by selecting Presets and selecting your preset
name from the list.
Related tasks
Copying Documents or Photos
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History
Changing LCD Screen Language

You can change the language used on the LCD screen.
43

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Language.
3. Select a language.

You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds.
3. Select Mute to turn off all control panel sounds, then go to step 7.
4. Select Normal Mode or Quiet Mode to adjust control panel sounds.
Note: You can also select the icon on the home screen to adjust sounds.
5. Select Button Press.
6. Select to decrease or to increase the sound and select OK when you are finished.
7. Select the back arrow to exit.
Note: You can also adjust the Sound Type and the sound level for various product functions.
Adjusting the Screen Brightness

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen.
44
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > LCD Brightness.
3. Select the – or + icons to decrease or increase the brightness.
4. Select OK to exit.
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting

The Operation Time Out setting causes the LCD screen to return to the Home screen after a few minutes
of inactivity. This feature is enabled by default, but you can turn it off.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings.
3. Scroll down and set Operation Time Out to Off.

It's a good idea to check Epson's support website occasionally for free updates to your product software.
Visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
and select your product.
Note: Your printer is designed to work only with genuine Epson-brand ink packs. Other brands of ink
packs and ink supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function
properly or at all. Epson periodically provides firmware updates to address issues of security,
performance, minor bug fixes and ensure the printer functions as designed. These updates may affect
the functionality of third-party ink. Non-Epson branded or altered Epson ink packs that functioned prior to
a firmware update may not continue to function.
• Windows: Your printer software automatically checks for updates. You can also manually update the
software by selecting Software Update here:
• Accessing the Windows Desktop and right-clicking the icon for your product in the right side of
the Windows taskbar, or clicking the up arrow and right-clicking .
• On the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window
45
You can also update the software by selecting EPSON Software Updater in the EPSON or Epson
Software program group, accessible by the Start button, or on the Start or Apps screens, depending
on your version of Windows.
• OS X: You can manually update the software by opening the Applications > Epson Software folder
and selecting EPSON Software Updater.
• macOS 10.12.x to 13.x: You can manually update the software by opening the App Store, selecting
Updates, searching for a software update option for Epson Software, and selecting Update.
Related references
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2
Using Power Saving Settings

Your product enters sleep mode automatically and turns off the LCD screen if it is not used for a period
of time. You can make the time period shorter and select other options to save energy and resources.
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings

You can adjust the time period before your product enters sleep mode and turns off the LCD screen.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sleep Timer.
Note: Enter the administrator password, if necessary.

• Select the – or + icon to decrease or increase the number of minutes.
• Select the number of minutes on the LCD screen, select the number of minutes from the on-
screen keypad, and select OK.
4. Select OK.
46
5. Select Wake from Sleep.
6. Select Touch LCD Screen to Wake.
• Select On to wake the printer from sleep mode by tapping the LCD touchscreen or by pressing a
button on the control panel.
• Select Off to wake the printer from sleep mode by only pressing a button on the control panel.
This prevents unintentional operations due to objects bumping the LCD touchscreen.
• Select Scheduled to set a time range for the feature to be enabled.
Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Related tasks
Adjusting Power Saving Settings

You can have the product turn off automatically if it is not used for a specified period of time.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Power Off Timer.
3. Select a time period between 30minutes and 12h (12 hours).
Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Related tasks
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More

Use your smartphone, tablet, or computer to print and scan documents, photos, emails, and web pages
from your home, office, or even across the globe.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
47
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
Print from anywhere with these Epson Connect solutions:

• Epson Email Print
• Epson Remote Print
Scan and send a file as an email or upload it to an online service directly from your Epson product with
Epson Scan to Cloud.
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Using Epson Email Print
Using Epson Remote Print
Using Epson Scan to Cloud

If you did not activate your product's email address for use with Epson Connect when you set up your
product, you can activate it using the product control panel.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Web Service Settings > Epson Connect Services.
3. Select Register.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to activate your product's email address.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related tasks

With Epson Email Print, you can print from any device that can send email, such as your smartphone,
tablet, or laptop. Just activate your product's unique email address. When you want to print, attach a
PDF, Microsoft Office document, or photo to an email and send it to your product. Both the email and the
attachments will print automatically.
48
1. Connect your product to your network. See the link below.
2. If you did not already set up Email Print when you installed your product software, see the link below
to use your product control panel to activate your unique email address. Or visit epson.com/connect
(U.S.), epson.ca/connect (Canada), or latin.epson.com/connect (Latin America) to learn more about
Email Print, create your Epson Connect account, and register your product to the Epson Connect
service.
3. Now you are ready to send and print emails to your product's Email Print address.
Note: Go to epsonconnect.com and log into your Epson Connect account to personalize your product's
email, adjust print settings, and set up other Epson Connect services.
Related tasks
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking

With Epson Remote Print software, you can print from your laptop or desktop computer to an Epson
Email-enabled product anywhere in the world.
1. Connect your Epson product to your wireless network. See the link below.
2. If you did not already set up an Epson Connect account when you installed your product software,
visit epsonconnect.com to create your account and register your product to the Epson Connect
service.
Note: Make a note of your product's email address.
3. Visit epsonconnect.com to learn more about Remote Print and how to download the Remote Print
Driver software.
4. Download and install the Remote Print software.
5. Enter the email address and optional access key of your Epson product during Remote Print setup.
6. Now you are ready to print remotely. Select the print command in your laptop or desktop computer
application and choose the Remote Print option for your Epson product.
49
Related tasks
Related topics

The Epson Scan to Cloud service allows you to scan and send a file as an email or upload it to an online
service directly from your Epson product. Register an email address or online services such as Box,
DropBox, Evernote, or Google Drive with your Epson Connect account.
1. Connect your Epson product to your network. See the link below.
2. If you did not already set up an Epson Connect account when you installed your product software,
visit epsonconnect.com to create your account and register your product to the Epson Connect
service.
Note: Make a note of your product's email address and password.
3. Visit epsonconnect.com to sign into your account with the email address and password you
selected.
4. Select your product, select Scan to Cloud, and select Destination List.
5. Click Add, then follow the instructions on the screen to create your destination list.
6. Now you are ready to use Scan to Cloud. Select the setting for scanning to Scan to Cloud on your
Epson product control panel.
Related tasks
Related topics

Use this free Apple and Android app to set up and control your Epson product. Epson Smart Panel also
lets you check product status.
Note: App features may vary depending on your Epson product.
50
1. Visit epson.com/connect (U.S.), epson.ca/connect (Canada), or latin.epson.com/connect (Latin
America) to learn more about Epson Smart Panel and check the compatibility of your mobile device.
2. Download Epson Smart Panel from the Apple App Store or Google Play.
• If your Epson product is already connected to a wireless network, connect your mobile device to
the same network. Then open Epson Smart Panel and select your Epson product, if necessary.
• If your Epson product is not connected to a wireless network, connect your mobile device to the
network you want to use, then open Epson Smart Panel and follow the instructions to set up your
Epson product.
Now you are ready to control your Epson product with your mobile device.
Related tasks
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet
Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Related topics
Using AirPrint
AirPrint enables instant wireless printing from iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac without the need to
install drivers or download software.
Note: If you disabled paper configuration messages on your product control panel, you cannot use
AirPrint. See the link below to enable the messages, if necessary.
1. Load paper in your product.

2. Set up your product for wireless printing. See the link below.
3. Connect your Apple device to the same wireless network that your product is using.
51
4. Print from your device to your product.
Note: For details, see the AirPrint page on the Apple website.

Related references
Paper Source Settings Options
Related topics

Your Epson printer supports native printing on Chromebook, allowing you to print from a Chromebook
without drivers or cables.
For directions on setting up your printer, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (U.S.)
or Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (Canada).
For Latin America, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook.
Printing from a Computer
Related topics

You can wirelessly print your documents, emails, photos, and web pages right from your Android phone
or tablet (Android v4.4 or later). With a few taps, your Android device will discover your nearby Epson
product and print.
2. On your Android device, download the Epson Print Enabler plug-in from Google Play.
3. Go to Settings on your Android device, select Printing, and enable the Epson plug-in, if necessary.
4. Connect your Android device to the same wireless network as your product.
5. Now you are ready to print. From an Android application such as Chrome or Gmail, tap the menu
icon and print whatever is on the screen.
Note: If you do not see your product, tap All Printers and select your product.
52
Related topics

You can use the Mopria Print Service to print from your Android phone or tablet (Android v4.4 or later) to
your Epson product or any Mopria-certified product from other manufacturers. You can download the
Mopria Print Service from Google Play.
Note: For details on the Mopria Print Service, click here (U.S.) or click here (Canada). Some Amazon
Fire tablets also use the Mopria Print Service.
2. On your Android device, download the Mopria Print Service app from Google Play.
Note: On some Samsung Galaxy devices, Mopria may come preinstalled.
3. Go to Settings on your Android device, select Printing, and enable the Mopria Print Service, if
necessary.
4. Connect your Android device to the same wireless network as your product.
5. Now you are ready to print. From an Android application such as Chrome or Gmail, tap the menu
icon and select Print. Then select All printers, select your Epson product, adjust your print settings,
and print.
Related topics
Take advantage of voice-activated, hands-free printing from your Epson product with Alexa, Siri, and
Google Assistant. Depending on which voice assistant you use, you can ask your product to print
photos, calendars, recipes, photo props, and more. Click here for more information.
1. Connect your product to your network. See the link below.
2. Set up your product's email address for use with Epson Connect. See the link below to activate it
from the product control panel.
53
3. Click here for instructions on how to set up your product and voice assistant to use the voice-
activated printing feature.
Now you are ready to print with your voice and your Epson product.
Related topics
54
See these sections to use your product on a Wi-Fi or wired network.
Network Security Recommendations
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Printing a Network Connection Report
Configuring Email Server Settings
Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related references
Related tasks
Using AirPrint
Network Security Recommendations

To help deter unauthorized access to your product over a network, you should protect your network
environment using appropriate security measures.
Security measures such as these can help deter threats such as loss of user data, use of telephone and
fax lines, and other intrusions:
• Enable security on your wireless LAN
Enable the appropriate security on the wireless LAN you plan to use with your product. Network
security such as a network password can deter interception of traffic over the wireless LAN. Your
55
router may already have a default password enabled by your Internet service provider (ISP). See your
ISP and router documentation for instructions on how to change the default password and better
secure your network.
• Connect your product only to a network protected by a firewall
Connecting your product directly to the Internet may leave it vulnerable to security threats. Instead,
connect it to a router or other network connection protected by a firewall. Your router may already
have a firewall set up by your Internet service provider; check with your ISP for confirmation. For best
results, set up and use a private IP address for your network connection.
• Change the default administrator password on your product
If your product has an option to set an administrator password, change the default administrator
password to deter access by unauthorized users to personal data stored on your product, such as IDs,
passwords, and contact lists.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup

You can set up your product to communicate with your computer using a wireless router or access point.
The wireless router or access point can be connected to your computer over a wireless or wired network.
56
1 Epson product
2 Wireless router or access point
3 Computer with a wireless interface
4 Computer
5 Internet
6 Ethernet cable (used only for wired connection to the wireless router or access point)


You can select or change wireless network settings using your product control panel.
To install your product on a wireless network, follow the instructions on the Start Here sheet and install
the necessary software by downloading it from the Epson website. The installer program guides you
through network setup.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is
not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.
2. Press the icon.

3. Select Router.
4. Select Start Setup, Change Settings, or Change to Wi-Fi Connection.
5. Select Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.
6. Select the name of your wireless network or select Enter Manually to enter the name manually. Use
the displayed keypad to enter your network name.
57
7. Select the Enter Password field and enter your wireless password using the displayed keypad.
Note: The network name and password are case sensitive. Be sure to correctly enter uppercase and
lowercase letters, and numeric or special characters.
• To move the cursor, select the left or right arrows.
• To change the case of letters, select .
• To delete the previous character, select .
• To enter numbers and symbols, select .

8. Select OK when you finish entering your password.
9. Confirm the displayed network settings and select Start Setup to save them.
A message appears when setup is complete.
10. Press the home button to exit.
You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly from
your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you installed
the network software as described on the Start Here sheet.
58
Note: If you don't see the icon, you may have selected the wrong network name or entered the
password incorrectly. Repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup

Related references
Related tasks
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup

You can set up your product to communicate directly with your computer or another device without
requiring a wireless router or access point. In Wi-Fi Direct Mode, the product itself acts as a network
access point for up to 8 devices.
1 Epson product
2 Computer with a wireless interface
3 Other wireless device
Note: The product normally uses W52 (36ch) as the channel when connecting to Wi-Fi Direct (Simple
AP). Since the channel for wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) connection is selected automatically, the channel used
may differ when used at the same time as a Wi-Fi Direct connection. Sending data to the printer may be
delayed if the channels are different. If it does not interfere with use, connect to the SSID in the 2.4 GHz
band. In the 2.4 GHz frequency band, the channels used will match.
59
When setting the wireless LAN to 5 GHz, we recommend disabling Wi-Fi Direct.

Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password

You can connect a mobile device directly to the printer without a wireless router or access point.
Note: Make sure the Epson Smart Panel app is installed on your mobile device before connecting to the
printer.
2. Select the icon.

3. Select Wi-Fi Direct .
4. Select Start Setup.
• If you are using Epson Smart Panel, open the Epson Smart Panel app on your device and select
the printer displayed on the LCD screen. Select Complete on the LCD screen.
• For iOS devices, select Other Methods, then select iOS. Scan the QR code with the camera app
on your device and follow the instructions on your device. On the printer LCD screen, select
Complete.
• For other types of devices, select Other Methods, then select Other OS Devices. Use your
device to select the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) displayed on the LCD screen, then enter the
password shown.
6. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete Wi-Fi Direct setup.
The Wi-Fi Direct icon displayed on the LCD screen indicates if Wi-Fi Direct is enabled on the
product.
If you are printing from a computer, make sure you installed the network software as described on
the Start Here sheet.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
60
Related references
Related tasks

You can modify the Wi-Fi Direct name and password to create a more descriptive and secure Wi-Fi
Direct network.
Note: If you are printing from a computer, make sure you installed the network software as described on
the Start Here sheet.
2. Select the icon.

3. Select Wi-Fi Direct.
4. Select Start Setup.
5. Select the Menu icon.
• To change the Wi-Fi Direct network name, select Change Network Name, and select Yes. Select
Change, then use the on-screen keyboard to enter the new network name.
• To change the Wi-Fi Direct password, select Change Password, then select Yes. Use the on-
screen keyboard to enter your new Wi-Fi Direct password.
Note: Your password must be at least 8 and no more than 22 characters long.
Note: If you have already connected devices or computers to your product via Wi-Fi Direct, they will
be disconnected when you change the network name or password.
7. When entering your Wi-Fi Direct network name or password, do the following:
• To enter letters or symbols, tap them on the LCD screen.
• To enter numbers and symbols or change the case of letters, select the 123# icon.
• To delete the previous character, select the back icon.
61
8. Use your computer or wireless device to select the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) displayed on the
LCD screen, then enter the password shown.
Note: Make a note of the SSID and password that appear.
9. Press the home button to return to the home screen.

Computers and wireless devices can now access the product using the new network name and
password.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Related references
Network Settings
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

If your network uses a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can quickly connect your
product to the network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).
Note: To check if your router is WPS-enabled, look for a button labeled WPS on your router or access
point. If there is no hardware button, there may be a virtual WPS button in the software for the device.
Check your network product documentation for details.
Using WPS to Connect to a Network

Using WPS to Connect to a Network

If you have a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can use Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) to
connect your product to the network.
2. Press the icon.
62
3. Select Router.
4. Select Change Settings, if necessary.
5. Select Push Button Setup (WPS).
6. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete WPS setup.
You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly from
your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you installed
the network software as described on the Start Here sheet.
Note: If you don't see the icon, repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

You can print a network status sheet to help you determine the causes of any problems you may have
using your product on a network.
63
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status > Print Status Sheet.
3. Select Print.
Examine the settings shown on the network status sheet to diagnose any problems you have.
Related references
Cannot Print Over a Network
Related tasks

You can print a network connection report to view solutions to any problems you may have using your
product on a network.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check.
3. Select Print Check Report.
Note: Select OK to return to the Network Settings menu without printing a report.
4. Select Print.
Examine the error codes and solutions shown on the network connection report.
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages
Related references
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
64
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages
Check the error codes and messages on the network connection report to solve problems you may
encounter with network connections. The tables here list solutions to problems based on the error codes
and messages that may appear on the top of the report.
1 Error code
2 Message
Note: Error codes and messages listed here may not all apply to your product.
Error Codes and Messages
Error code and message Solution

E-1 Make sure your router, access point, and/or hub are
turned on, and the network cable is securely connected to
Confirm that the network cable is
your device and to your product.
connected and network devices such as
hub, router, or access point are turned on. If you are trying to set up Wi-Fi, remove the network cable
and set up Wi-Fi again. Ethernet and Wi-Fi cannot be
connected at the same time.
65
E-2, E-3, or E-7 Check the following:
No wireless network names (SSID) found. • Make sure your router or access point is turned on, and
Confirm that the router/access point is is correctly connected to your computer or network
turned on and the wireless network (SSID) device.
is set up correctly. Contact your network
• Turn off the router or access point, wait about 10
seconds, and turn it on again.
No wireless network names (SSID) found.
• Move your product closer to your router or access point,
Confirm that the wireless network name
and remove any obstacles between them. Also move
(SSID) of the PC you wish to connect is set
your product away from devices such as wireless
up correctly. Contact your network
phones or microwaves.
• Confirm that the SSID shown on the network
Entered security key/password does not
connection report matches the label on your router or
match the one set for your router/access
access point. Also make sure your SSID uses only
point. Confirm security key/password.
ASCII characters and symbols, or your product cannot
Contact your network administrator for
display the SSID correctly.
assistance.
• If you are trying to connect using the WPS push button
method, make sure your router or access point supports
it.
• If you are using a network password, check the label on
your router or access point to confirm that you are using
the correct password, or check with your network
administrator or router/access point documentation.
• If you are connecting to a smart device that generates
an SSID, check the device documentation for the SSID
and password you should use.
• If your wireless connection suddenly disconnects, and
another smart device was added to the network using a
WPS push button method or your network was set up
using a non-WPS push button method, try downloading
and installing your product software again.
66
E-5 If the security on your router or access point is not one of
the following types, change the type of security on your
Security mode (e.g. WEP, WPA) does not
router or access point and reset your product's network
match the current setting of the printer.
settings.
Confirm security mode. Contact your
network administrator for assistance.
E-6 If your router or access point has MAC address filtering
enabled, register your product's MAC address so it is not
MAC address of your printer may be
filtered. Locate the MAC address on the network
filtered. Check whether your router/access
connection report and check your router or access point
point has restrictions such as MAC address
documentation for instructions.
filtering. See the documentation of the
router/access point or contact your network If your router or access point is using shared
administrator for assistance. authentication with WEP security, confirm that you are
using the correct authentication key and index.
If your router or access point limits the number of
connected devices, raise the connection limit. See your
router or access point documentation for instructions.
E-8 If your product's Obtain IP Address setting is set to Auto,
enable DHCP on your router or access point. If it is set to
Incorrect IP address is assigned to the
Manual, the IP address may be out of range or on a
printer. Confirm IP address setup of the
different network segment; set a valid IP address using
network device (hub, router, or access
your product control panel or the Web Config utility.
point). Contact your network administrator
for assistance. You can also try turning off your product and the router or
access point, waiting about 10 seconds, and turning them
on again.
E-9 Make sure your computer or network device are turned
on. Also make sure that you can access the Internet and
Confirm the connection and network setup
other devices on the same network from the devices you
of the PC or other device. Connection using
are trying to connect to your product.
the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact
your network administrator for assistance. If you still cannot connect to your product, turn off your
router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it
on again. Download and install your product software
again to reset your network settings.
67
E-10 Make sure other devices on the network are turned on and
do the following:
Confirm IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway setup. Connection using • If your product's Obtain IP Address setting is set to
the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact Manual, check the IP address, subnet mask, and
your network administrator for assistance. default gateway addresses on the network connection
report to see if they are correct. If not, correct the
settings.
• If DHCP is enabled, set your product's Obtain IP
Address setting to Auto. If you want to use the DHCP-
assigned address as a static address, set the Obtain IP
Address setting to Manual, enter the product's IP
address as listed on the network connection report, and
set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
If you still cannot connect to your product, turn off your
router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it
on again.
E-11 If you set your product's TCP/IP Setup setting to Manual,
check that the default gateway address listed on the
Setup is incomplete. Confirm default
network connection report is correct. Also turn on the
gateway setup. Connection using the
device that is set as the default gateway.
EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact your
network administrator for assistance.
68
E-12 Make sure other devices on the network are turned on and
do the following:
Confirm the following:
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask, and default
-Entered security key/password is correct
gateway addresses are correct, if you are entering them
-Index of the security key/password is set to manually.
the first number
• Confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway
-IP address, subnet mask, or default addresses for other devices are the same.
gateway setup is correct
• Make sure the IP address does not conflict with other
Contact your network administrator for devices.
assistance.
If you still cannot connect to your product, do the
following:
• Turn off your router or access point, wait about 10
seconds, and turn it on again.
• Download and install your product software again to
reset your network settings.
• If your router or access point uses WEP security with
several registered passwords, make sure that the first
registered password is set on your product.
E-13 Make sure your router, access point, and/or hub are
turned on. Also make sure the TCP/IP setup on your
Confirm the following:
router, access point, and/or hub is not set manually; this
-Entered security key/password is correct may cause your product's network settings to differ from
-Index of the security key/password is set to the manually set up devices.
the first number If you still cannot connect to your product, do the
-Connection and network setup of the PC following:
or other device is correct • Turn off your router or access point, wait about 10
Contact your network administrator for seconds, and turn it on again.
assistance. • Download and install your product software again to
reset your network settings.
• If your router or access point uses WEP security with
several registered passwords, make sure that the first
registered password is set on your product.
69
Network Environment Messages
Message Solution
The Wi-Fi environment needs to be Move your product closer to your router or access point,
improved. Turn the wireless router off and and remove any obstacles between them. Then turn off
then turn it on. If the connection does not your router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and
improve, see the documentation for the turn it back on again. If you still cannot connect to your
wireless router. product, check the documentation that came with your
router or access point for solutions.
*No more devices can be connected. You can connect up to 8 computers or other devices to
Disconnect one of the connected devices if your product using a Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection.
you want to add another one. If you want to add another device, disconnect an existing
connected device first.
The same SSID as Wi-Fi Direct exists in Change the Wi-Fi Direct SSID.
the environment. Change the Wi-Fi Direct
SSID if you cannot connect a smart device
to the printer.
Parent topic: Printing a Network Connection Report

To use features such as scanning to email or forwarding faxes to email, you need to configure the email
server. You can select settings for the email server using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings.
3. Select one of the options, then select the settings you want to use. Contact your internet service
provider if necessary to confirm the authentication method for the email server.
4. Select Proceed to save your settings.
5. Select Close to exit.
6. Select Connection Check to verify the connection to the email server.
70
Email Server Settings
Related tasks
Scanning to Email
Email Server Settings

Setting name Available options Description
Authentication Off Selects the authentication method for the printer to access
Method the mail server.
SMTP AUTH
SMTP AUTH: Authenticates on the SMTP server
POP before SMTP
(outgoing mail server) when sending the email. The mail
server needs to support SMTP authentication.
POP before SMTP Authenticates on the POP3 server
(receiving mail server) before sending the email. When
you select this item, set the POP3 server.
Authenticated —
Lets you enter a user name or email address for the mail
Account
server. Used with the POP before SMTP and SMTP
AUTH methods.
Authenticated — Lets you enter a password for the authenticated account.
Password Used with the POP before SMTP and SMTP AUTH
methods.
Sender's Email —
Lets you enter the email address to be displayed to the
Address
sender
SMTP Server — Lets you enter the address of the SMTP server
Address
SMTP Server Port — Lets you enter the port number of the SMTP server. The
Number default port is 25.
Secure None Selects the encryption protocol used by the email server.
Connection Used with the SMTP AUTH or Off authentication methods.
STARTTLS
SSL/TLS
71
Setting name Available options Description
Certificate Enable Determines whether the CA Certificate is validated. You
Validation must import a CA certificate to use this setting.
Disable
POP3 Server — Lets you enter the address of the POP3 server using IPv4
Address or FQDN format.
POP3 Server Port — Lets you enter the port number of the POP3 server. The
Number default port is 25.
Parent topic: Configuring Email Server Settings
Changing or Updating Network Connections

See these sections to change or update how your product connects to a network.
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router
Disabling Wi-Fi Features

If you have already connected your product to your computer using a USB connection, you can change
to a Wi-Fi connection.
1. Disconnect the USB cable from your product.
2. Uninstall your product software.
3. Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the
Start Here sheet.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related concepts
Uninstall Your Product Software

If you have already connected your product to your computer wirelessly, you can change to a wired
network connection if necessary.
72
1. Disable your product's Wi-Fi features.
2. Connect one end of an Ethernet network cable to the product's LAN port.
3. Connect the other end to any available LAN port on your router or access point.
4. Uninstall your product software.
5. Download and install your product software from the Epson website.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
7. When you see the Select Your Connection screen, select Wired network connection.
8. If you see a Select Setup Option screen, select Set up printer for the first time.
9. Continue following the rest of the on-screen instructions.
Related concepts
Related tasks

If you change the wireless router you have been using on your network, you need to update your
product's Wi-Fi connection to the new router.
Note: If you switch to a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation for instructions.

• Windows: Uninstall your product software.
• Mac: Go to the next step.
2. Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the
Start Here sheet.
Related concepts
73
You may need to disable your product's Wi-Fi features if you change your network connection type or
need to solve a problem with your network connection.
Note: Before disabling Wi-Fi features, make a note of your product's SSID (network name) and
password, and any network settings selected for the Epson Connect services you may use.
2. Press the icon.

3. Select Router > Change Settings > Others > Disable Wi-Fi > Start Setup.
A message appears after Wi-Fi is disabled.
Related tasks
74
Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing
Before enabling PCL or PostScript printing on your product, make sure you have installed the software
as described on the Start Here sheet (WF-C5890).
To download the PCL or PostScript drivers, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada),
or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Installing the PCL Driver - Windows
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet
Installing the PCL Driver - Windows

The PCL driver can be installed on a Windows computer. Before enabling PCL printing on your product,
make sure you have installed the software as described on the Start Here sheet.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software. Depending on your model, not all printer languages may be supported.
1. To download the PCL file, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or

latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software.
75
3. Follow the on-screen instructions until you see this screen:
4. If your product is already connected to a network, select Yes: Network connection and click OK.
76
5. Make sure your product is selected, and click OK.
A message appears when the installation is complete.
6. If your product is not connected to a network, select No: USB connection and click OK. Connect a
USB cable to your product's USB port, and connect the other end of the cable to your computer.
A message appears when the installation is complete.
Parent topic: Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows

If you did not install the standard Epson printer software or Epson Universal Print Driver, you need to
install the PostScript (PS3) printer software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your
network printer.
installing the printer software.
1. To download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript file, visit
epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
3. Click OK.
4. Click Accept.
5. Click Install.
6. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac

If you did not install the standard Epson printer software, you need to install the PostScript (PS3) printer
software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer.
installing the printer software.
77
1. To download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript file, visit
epson.com/support (U.S), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
3. Double-click EPSON.
4. Click Continue on the next two screens.
5. Click Agree.
6. Click Install.
7. If necessary, enter the administrator password.
8. Click Start and follow the on-screen instructions.
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings

You can select settings for PCL and PostScript printing using the control panel on the product.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > PDL Print Configuration.
3. Select one of the available options, then select the PDL print configuration options you want to use.
4. When you are finished, press the home button to exit.
PDL Print Configuration Options
PDL Print Configuration Options

Select the PDL Print Configuration options you want to use for PCL or PostScript printing.
Common Settings menu
78
Option Available Description
settings
Paper Size Various sizes Sets the default paper size for PCL or PostScript
printing
Paper Type Various paper Sets the default paper type for PCL or PostScript
types printing
Orientation Portrait Sets the default orientation for PCL or PostScript
printing
Landscape
Quality Draft Sets the quality for PCL or PostScript printing
Standard
Best
Ink Save Mode On/Off Saves ink by reducing print density
Print Order Last Page on Starts printing from the first page of a file
Top
First Page on Starts printing from the last page of a file
Top
Number of Copies 1 to 999 Selects the number of copies to print
Binding Margin Left Edge Specifies the binding edge for double-sided documents
Top Edge
Auto Paper Ejection On/Off Ejects paper automatically when printing is stopped
during a print job
2-Sided Printing On/Off Selects duplex printing
PCL Menu

settings
Font Source Resident Uses a font preinstalled on the printer
Download Uses a font you have downloaded
Font Number 1 to 111 Selects the default font number for the default font
source
79
settings
Pitch 0.44 to 99.99 cpi Selects the default font pitch if the font is scalable and
fixed-pitch (availability depends on font source and
number settings)
Height 4.00 to 999.75 pt Selects the default font height if the font is scalable and
proportional (availability depends on font source and
number settings)
Symbol Set Various Selects the default symbol set. If the selected font is not
available for the selected symbol set, the font source
and number are replaced with IBM-US (the default
setting).
Form 5 to 128 lines Sets the number of lines for the selected paper size and
orientation. Changes the line spacing (VMI) stored in
the printer. Later changes in page size or orientation
cause changes in the Form value based on the stored
VMI.
CR Function CR Selects the line feed command when printing with a
driver from a specific operating system
CR+LF
LF Function LF
CR+LF
Paper Source Assign 4 Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 4
4K Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 4000, 5000, and 8000
5S Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 5S
PS Menu

settings
Error Sheet On/Off Prints a sheet showing the status when errors occur
during PostScript or PDF printing
80
settings
Coloration Color Selects the color mode for PostScript printing
Mono
Binary On/Off Enable when printing files that contain binary images
(available when the product is connected to the
network). Allows you to print binary images even if the
driver is set to ASCII.
PDF Page Size Various sizes Selects the paper size when printing a PDF file. If Auto
is selected, the paper size is determined based on the
size of the first page.
Parent topic: Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings

You can select printer language and interface settings using the control panel on the product.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings.
3. Select the printing language and interface options for your connection type.
4. When you are finished, press the home button to return to the Home screen.
Printing Language and Interface Options
Printing Language and Interface Options

Select the printing language and interface options you want to use.
Main Printer Settings menu
81
settings
PC Connection via USB Enable Select whether to allow USB communication with the
product
Disable
USB I/F Timeout Setting 0 to 300 seconds Specify the length of time before ending USB
communication from a computer using the PCL or
PostScript driver. This setting is necessary to avoid
endless USB communication.
Printing Language menu

settings
USB Auto Select the language for the USB or network interface
Network PCL
PS
PDF
Parent topic: Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet

You can print a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) status sheet to confirm the current font information.
2. Select Settings > Printer Status/Print > Print Status Sheet.
3. Select PS Font List or PCL Font List .
4. Select Print to print the status sheet.
82
Loading Paper
Before you print, load paper for the type of printing you will do.
Note: Load only plain paper when printing with the PCL or PostScript (PS3) printer software (WF-
C5890).
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray

Paper Loading Capacity
Double-sided Printing Capacity
Compatible Epson Papers
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator

You can load paper up to Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) in the paper cassettes and the rear
paper feeder.
1. To view animated instructions on how to load paper in the rear paper tray or paper cassettes, press
the help button and select How To > Load Paper. Select a paper source and paper type.
2. If you are loading pre-punched paper, glossy paper, envelopes, or long paper in the rear paper tray,
do one of the following:
• Load one sheet of pre-punched paper, short edge first as shown.
83
• Load sheets of paper with their glossy or printable side visible.
• Load up to 10 envelopes, short edge first with the flap facing down and to the left
• Load long paper by allowing the paper to roll over as shown. Select the user-defined setting as the
paper size setting.
3. Set the paper size and type on the LCD.
Note: If you do not want to display the paper settings screen when you load paper, set the Settings
> General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Paper Setup Auto Display
setting to Off.
Always follow these paper loading guidelines:

• Load only the recommended number of sheets.
• Load paper short edge first, no matter which way your document faces.
• Load letterhead or pre-printed paper top edge first.
• Do not load paper above the arrow mark inside the edge guides.
• Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions.
84
Caution: Do not load the following papers; they may cause paper jams, smears on the printout, or
damage to the printer.
• Papers that are wavy or damp
• Papers that have not dried after printing on one side
• Papers that are wadded or curled
• Papers that are torn, cut, or folded
• Papers that are too thick or thin
• Pre-printed papers printed by other inkjet printers, thermal transfer printers, page printers, or copiers
• Papers that are perforated
• Papers that have stickers
• Papers held together with tape, staples, or paper clips
• Envelopes with adhesive surfaces or windows
Parent topic: Loading Paper

Related references
Paper Specifications
Copies Have Incorrect or Faint Colors
Incorrect Margins on Printout
Incorrect Image Size or Position
Slanted Printout
Blurry or Smeared Printout
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
85
Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Paper Guide

Paper type Paper cassette loading capacity
Plain paper 250 sheets (cassette 1): 500 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):
Pre-printed paper A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches
[105 × 148 mm]) [105 × 148 mm])
Letterhead paper
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches
Colored paper
[148 × 210 mm]) [148 × 210 mm])
Recycled paper
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]) [210 × 297 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches
[182 × 257 mm]) [182 × 257 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches
[140 × 216 mm]) [353 × 250 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches
[184 × 267 mm]) [184 × 267 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches
[215 × 315 mm]) [215 × 315 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]) [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches
[216 × 340 mm]) [216 × 340 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches Legal (8.5 × 14 inches
[216 × 356 mm]) [216 × 356 mm])
User-Defined (3.3 × 4.9 inches to User-Defined (3.9 × 5.8 inches to
8.5 × 14 inches [85 × 125 mm to 8.5 × 14 inches [100 × 148 mm to
216 × 356 mm]) 216 × 356 mm])
Epson Bright White Pro Paper 200 sheets (cassette 1) or 400 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
86
Epson Bright White Premium 250 sheets (cassette 1) or 500 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):
Paper
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Epson Multipurpose Plus
Paper
Epson High Quality Ink Jet 80 sheets
Paper
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Epson Presentation Paper
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
Matte
Epson Ultra Premium Photo 50 (cassette 1): 50 (cassettes 2 to 4):
Paper Glossy
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
Epson Premium Photo Paper [216 × 279 mm])
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm)
Glossy
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Semi-gloss Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
Epson Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
87
Card Stock 1 (25 to 42 lb [91 90 sheets (cassette 1) 250 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):
to 160 g/m2])
A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches
[105 × 148 mm]) [105 × 148 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches
[148 × 210 mm]) [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]) [210 × 297 mm])
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]) B6 (5 × 7.2 inches
[128 × 182 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches
[182 × 257 mm]) B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches
[182 × 257 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches
[140 × 216 mm]) Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches
[140 × 216 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches
[184 × 267 mm]) Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches
[184 × 267 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches
[215 × 315 mm]) Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches
[215 × 315 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches
[216 × 340 mm]) Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches
[216 × 340 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches
[216 × 356 mm]) Legal (8.5 × 14 inches
[216 × 356 mm])
User-Defined (3.3 × 4.9 inches to
8.5 × 14 inches [85 × 125 mm to User-Defined (3.9 × 5.8 inches to
216 × 356 mm]) 8.5 × 14 inches [100 × 148 mm to
216 × 356 mm])
Card Stock 2 (43 to 68 lb [161 — (cassette 1) — (cassettes 2 to 4)
to 256 g/m2])
Envelopes 10 (cassette 1) — (cassettes 2 to 4)
88
Paper type Rear paper feeder loading capacity
Plain paper 80 sheets:
Pre-printed paper A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
Letterhead paper A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
Colored paper A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
Recycled paper B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
User-Defined (2.5 × 4.9 inches to 8.5 × 236 inches
[64 × 125 mm to 216 × 6000 mm])
Epson Bright White Pro Paper 50 sheets
Epson Bright White Premium Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper 70 sheets
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper 20 sheets
Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-
gloss
Epson Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Presentation Paper
Matte
89
Paper type Rear paper feeder loading capacity
Card Stock 1 (25 to 42 lb [91 to 160 30 sheets:
g/m2])
A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
Card Stock 2 (43 to 68 lb [161 to 256
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
g/m2])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
Envelopes 10

Related tasks
90
Paper type Auto duplex (paper cassettes)
Plain paper 250 sheets (cassette 1): 500 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):
Pre-printed paper A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches
[148 × 210 mm]) [148 × 210 mm])
Letterhead paper
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
Colored paper
[210 × 297 mm]) [210 × 297 mm])
Recycled paper
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches
[182 × 257 mm]) [182 × 257 mm])
[184 × 267 mm]) [184 × 267 mm])
[216 × 279 mm]) [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to 8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to
216 × 297 mm]) 216 × 297 mm])
Epson Bright White Pro 200 sheets (cassette 1) 400 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4)
Paper
Epson Bright White Premium
Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus
Paper
91
Paper type Auto duplex (paper cassettes)
Card Stock 1 (25 to 42 lb [91 90 sheets (cassette 1): 250 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):
to 160 g/m2])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches
[148 × 210 mm]) [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]) [210 × 297 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches
[182 × 257 mm]) [182 × 257 mm])
[184 × 267 mm]) [184 × 267 mm])
[216 × 279 mm]) [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to 8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to
216 × 297 mm]) 216 × 297 mm])
Paper type Manual duplex (rear paper tray)

Plain paper 30 sheets:
Pre-printed paper A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
Letterhead paper A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
Colored paper B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
Recycled paper Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
User-Defined (5.8 × 8.2 inches to 8.5 × 11.7 inches
[148 × 210 mm to 216 × 297 mm])
92
Paper type Manual duplex (rear paper tray)
Epson Bright White Pro Paper 30 sheets
Card Stock 1 (25 to 42 lb [91 to 160 g/m2]) 5 sheets:
Card Stock 2 (43 to 68 lb [161 to 256 g/m2]) A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
User-Defined (5.8 × 8.2 inches to 8.5 × 11.7 inches
[148 × 210 mm to 216 × 297 mm])

Related references
Job Status Error Codes
Related tasks
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
93
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales),
epson.ca (Canadian sales), or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies
from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the
U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Note: Paper/media availability varies by country.
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet count

Epson Bright White Pro Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S041586 500
[216 × 279 mm])
Epson Bright White Premium Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S450218-4 500
Paper [216 × 279 mm])
Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S450217-4 500
[216 × 279 mm])
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S041111 100
[216 × 279 mm])
Epson Presentation Paper Matte Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S041062 100
[216 × 279 mm])
Epson Premium Presentation Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S041257 50
Paper Matte [216 × 279 mm])
S042180 100
Epson Photo Paper Glossy 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S041809 50
S042038 100
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S041141 20
[216 × 279 mm])
S041649 50
S041271 100
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches S041140 20
[210 × 297 mm])
94
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet count
Epson Premium Photo Paper 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S041808 40
Glossy
S041727 100
16:9 wide (4 × 7.1 inches S042109 20
[102 × 181 mm])
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm) S041464 20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041465 20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S042183 25
[216 × 279 mm])
S041667 50
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S042181 60
Glossy
S042174 100
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm) S041945 20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041946 20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S042182 25
[216 × 279 mm])
S042175 50
Epson Premium Photo Paper 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S041982 40
Semi-gloss
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches S041331 20
[216 × 279 mm])

Related references
Incorrect Colors
95
For this paper Select this paper Type or Media Type setting
Plain paper Plain Paper / Bright White Paper
Epson Bright White Pro Paper
Letterhead paper Letterhead
Recycled paper Recycled
Colored paper Color
Pre-printed paper Preprinted
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper High Quality Plain Paper
2
Thick paper up to 25 to 42 lb (91 to 160 g/m ) Card Stock 1
Thick paper up to 43 to 68 lb (161 to 256 g/m2 ) Card Stock 2
Envelopes Envelope
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Photo Paper Glossy Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss Premium Photo Paper Semi-Gloss
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Presentation Paper Matte Presentation Paper Matte
Note: The settings listed here are available only when printing from your computer; they do not apply to
your product's control panel settings.

Related references
Slanted Printout
White or Dark Lines in Printout
96
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows

You can change the default paper size and paper type for each source using the control panel on the
product.
1. Press the Paper Setting button.
2. Select the paper source you want to select settings for.
3. Select Paper Size.
4. Select the paper size you loaded.
5. Select Paper Type.
6. Select the paper type for the paper you loaded.
7. Select another paper source to change or press the home button to exit.
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Related references
Paper Ejection Problems
Slanted Printout
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel

Select a Paper Type setting that matches the paper you loaded.
Paper type loaded Paper Type setting

Plain paper Plain Paper
Epson Bright White Pro Paper
97
Paper type loaded Paper Type setting
Letterhead paper Letterhead
Recycled paper Recycled
Colored paper Color
Pre-printed paper Preprinted
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper High Quality Plain Paper
2
Thick paper up to 25 to 42 lb (91 to 160 g/m ) Card Stock 1
Thick paper up to 43 to 68 lb (161 to 256 g/m2) Card Stock 2
Envelopes Envelope
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy Ultra Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Prem. Glossy
Epson Photo Paper Glossy Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss Prem. Semi-Gloss
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Prem. Matte
Epson Presentation Paper Matte Presentation Matte
Parent topic: Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator

As an administrator, you can adjust default paper settings that apply to all print jobs sent to the product.
Selecting the Default Printer Settings

Selecting the Universal Print Settings
Selecting the Default Printer Settings

You can change default printer settings using the control panel on the product.
98

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings.
3. Select an Auto Error Solver setting:
• Select On to display a warning and print single-sided when a 2-sided printing error occurs, or to
print only what the printer could process when a full memory error occurs.
• Select Off to display an error message and stop printing if an error occurs.
4. Select Paper Source Settings.
5. Select the options you want to use.
Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Select the paper source options you want to use for your print jobs.
Paper Source Available settings Description

Settings option
Paper Setting Various Select the paper size and type for each paper source
Paper Tray On Select On to give printing priority to paper loaded in the rear
Priority paper tray
Off
A4/Letter Auto On Select On to switch the selected paper size to match the
Switching loaded paper (Letter or A4) if the wrong size is selected
Off
Auto Select Copy Select On for a paper source to allow the printer to
Settings automatically print on paper from that source if it matches
Fax
your paper settings. You can set automatic selection for
Other each function separately. If a paper source is specified
during a print job, this setting will be ignored.
99
Paper Source Available settings Description
Settings option
Automatic On Select On to enable switching to another paper source if
Selection at paper runs out during copying. Both the chosen paper
Off
Paper Out : For source and the alternate paper source must be enabled in
Copy the Auto Select Settings setting.
Error Notice Paper Size Notice Select On for either of these settings to display an error
message when the selected paper type or size does not
Paper Type Notice
match the loaded paper
Paper Setup On Select On to automatically display a menu that lets you
Auto Display select the paper size and type when you load paper in the
Off
product
Note: If you turn this setting off, you cannot use AirPrint.
Parent topic: Selecting the Default Printer Settings

Related references
Related tasks
Using AirPrint
Selecting the Universal Print Settings

You can change the default universal print settings using the control panel on the product.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Universal Print Settings.
3. Adjust the settings as necessary.
Universal Print Settings Options
Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
100
Universal Print Settings Options
Select the universal print setting options you want to use for your print jobs.
Universal Print Available settings Description

Settings option
Top Offset — Adjust the top or left margin
Left Offset
Top Offset in — Adjust the top or left margin of the back page when printing
Back double-sided.
Left Offset in
Back
Check Paper On Select On to check the paper width before printing. This
Width prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper when the
Off
paper size settings are incorrect, but may reduce the
printing speed.
Skip Blank Page On Select On to skip printing of blank pages automatically
Off
Parent topic: Selecting the Universal Print Settings
101
Placing Originals on the Product
Follow the instructions here to place your original documents or photos on the product.
Caution: Do not place anything on top of your product or use its cover as a writing surface to avoid
damaging it.
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder

Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Related references
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size
Scanned Image Quality Problems
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped
Related tasks
Scanning to Email
Scanning to a Memory Device
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program
Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2
Scanning Two Originals onto One Sheet (Stitching Images) - Windows
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac
Sending a Fax on Demand
Sending a Stored Fax
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone
102
Related topics
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture

You can place single- or multi-page original documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). You
can also use the ADF to scan both sides of a 2-sided document. Make sure the originals meet the
Automatic Document Feeder specifications before loading them.
Caution: Do not load the following types of originals in the ADF, or they may be damaged or may
damage the scanner. Use the scanner glass for these types:
• Ripped, curled, folded, deteriorated, or wrinkled originals
• Originals with holes
• Originals containing staples or paper clips
• Originals with carbon paper backing
• Originals with labels, stickers, or sticky notes
• Originals that are bound
• Originals that are cut irregularly or not cut at a right angle
• Photos or valuable artwork
• Thermal paper
• Transparencies
• Fabric or other non-paper originals
• Originals with uneven surfaces, such as embossed documents
• Originals with wet ink
Note: When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in
the ADF.
Note: Do not load originals above the line under the triangle symbol on the ADF edge guide. Do not load
originals while scanning.
1. Select the icon and select How To > Place Originals > ADF.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
103
Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product
Related references
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Related tasks
Related topics
Copying
Scanning
Faxing

You can place originals up to this size on the scanner glass: Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) or
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]).
Note: When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in
the ADF.
1. Press the help button and select How To > Place Originals > Scanner Glass.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Caution: Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when opening or closing the document cover.
Do not push down on the document cover or scanner glass or you may damage the product.
Note: If there is any dust or dirt on the scanner glass, the scanning range may expand to include it,
so the image of the original may be displaced or reduced. Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to remove any
dust and dirt on the scanner glass before scanning. When placing bulky originals such as books,
prevent exterior light from shining directly onto the scanner glass.
Note: The edges of your original may be cropped by 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) from the edge of the
scanner glass. Manually position your original away from the edges to prevent cropping.
Remove your originals after scanning. If you leave the originals on the scanner glass for a long time, they
may stick to the glass surface.
Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product
104
Related references
Position, Size, or Margins of Copies are Incorrect
Related tasks
Related topics
Copying
Scanning
Faxing
105
Copying
See the information here to copy documents or photos using your product.
Note: Copies may not be exactly the same size as your originals.

Copying Options
Related tasks

You can copy documents or photos onto various sizes and types of paper, including Epson special
papers.
1. Place your original document or photo on the scanner glass, or place multi-page documents in the
ADF.
2. Load the paper you want to print on.
4. Select Copy.
5. To print more than one copy, press a number key on the product's control panel, or select Copies
and use the displayed keypad to enter the number of copies.
6. Change any of the displayed settings as necessary.
7. Select Advanced to view and change additional copy settings, if necessary.
8. Select Preview to preview your copy on the LCD screen.
9. Select Presets to save your copy settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact
10. When you are ready to copy, press the Copy icon.
Note: To cancel printing, press the cancel button or select Cancel.
106
Parent topic: Copying
Related references
Copying Options
Copying Options
Related tasks
Using Presets
Copying Options
Select the copying options you want to use for your copies.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on other copying settings.
Basic Settings
Copying option Available settings Description

Color — Copies the document in color
B&W — Copies the document in black and white
Density Varying levels Adjusts the lightness or darkness of copies
Paper Setting Various sources Select the paper source that you want to use. If you select
Auto, paper is fed automatically depending on the paper
settings you selected for the paper sources.
Reduce/Enlarge Auto Automatically sizes the image to fit the paper size you
selected
100% Copies the original at its full size
Various percentages Automatically converts from one size to another
and other
conversions
Reduce to Fit Paper Automatically decreases the size of the image by the
percentage you select
107
Original Type Text Specifies the document type of your originals and adjusts
the quality of your copies
Text & Image
Photo
Text & Image(Best)
Barcode
2-Sided 1>1-Sided Select to make 2-sided copies. When you select 2>2 Sided,
1>2-Sided, or 2>1-Sided, you can scroll down to select the
2>2-Sided
orientation and binding edge for your originals or copies.
1>2-Sided
2>1-Sided
Advanced settings

Multi-Page Single Page Copies each page of the original onto an individual sheet
2-up Copies multiple page documents onto one sheet. Scroll
down and select the document orientation and layout order
4-up
settings as necessary.
Original Size Various sizes Select the document size of your original. When copying
non-standard sized originals, select the closest size.
108
Finishing Group (Same Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
Pages) unordered groups
Collate (Page Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in

Order) ordered sets
Orientation Readable Direction Specifies the orientation of your originals

(Original)
Left Direction
Image Quality Various settings Select advanced quality settings such as Saturation and
Sharpness
Binding Margin Off Select On to adjust the margin, binding position, and
orientation of the pages when copying a book
On
Reduce to Fit Off Select On to automatically decrease the image by the
Paper percentage you select
On
Remove Shadow Off Select On to erase the shadows that appear in the center of
a document when copying a book or that appear around a
On
document when copying thick paper
Remove Punch Off Select On to erase the binding holes on a document
Holes
On
ID Card Copy Off Select On to copy both sides of an ID card onto one side of
a sheet of paper
On
Parent topic: Copying
109
Related references
Related tasks
110
Before printing from your computer, make sure you have set up your product and installed its software
as described on the Start Here sheet.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website. If you see a Software Update screen, select Enable automatic checking
and click OK. The update scans your system to see if you have the latest product software. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows

Printing with the Built-in Epson Driver - Windows 10 S
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows

You can print with the standard Epson printer software using any Windows printing program, as
described in these sections.
Store.

Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
111
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer

Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use.
Note: You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings.
112
You see the Main tab of your printer settings window:
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting.
Note: You can also select the User-Defined setting to create a custom paper size.
6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
113
8. Select the Quality setting that matches the print quality you want to use.
9. Select a Color option:
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
• To print text and graphics in black or shades of gray, select the Grayscale setting.
10. To print on both sides of the paper, select the 2-Sided Printing setting and select the options you
want.
11. To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, or print one image on multiple sheets of paper, select
one of the settings in the Multi-Page menu and select the printing options you want.
12. To print multiple copies and arrange their print order, select the Copies options.
13. To preview your job before printing, select Print Preview.
14. To save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with other print jobs, select
Job Arranger Lite.
15. To reduce noise during printing when you select Plain Paper/Bright White Paper, select On in the
Quiet Mode menu.
Note: Enabling Quiet Mode may reduce printing speed.
Paper Source Options - Windows

Print Quality Options - Windows
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Related references
Slanted Printout
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps
Grainy Printout
Related tasks
114
Paper Source Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size.
Paper Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 2
Paper Cassette 3
Paper Cassette 4
Paper Tray
Selects the paper in the rear feed as the paper source.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Print Quality Options - Windows
You can select any of the available Quality options to fine-tune the quality of your print. Some settings
may be unavailable, depending on the paper type and border setting you have chosen.
Draft
For draft printing on plain paper.
Standard
For everyday text and image printing.
High
For photos and graphics with high print quality.
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Multi-Page menu to set up your multi-page print job.
2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up
Prints several pages on one sheet of paper. Click the Layout Order button to select page layout and
border options.
115
2×1 Poster, 2×2 Poster, 3×3 Poster, 4×4 Poster
Prints one image on multiple sheets of paper to create a larger poster. Click the Settings button to
select image layout and guideline options.

You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting one of the 2-Sided Printing options on the Main tab.
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen
or if you are accessing the product over a network.
1. Select one of the following options for 2-Sided Printing:

• Auto (Long-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper
on the long edge.
• Auto (Short-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper
on the short edge.
2. Click the Settings button.
116
You see this window:
3. Select the double-sided printing options you want to use.

4. Click OK to return to the Main tab.
5. Click the Print Density button.
117
6. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software
automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
7. If necessary, select the Adjustments options you want to use.
8. Click OK to return to the Main tab.
9. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings.
10. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing.
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows
Print Density Adjustments - Windows
Related references
Related tasks
118
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options on the 2-Sided Printing Settings window to set up your
double-sided print job.
Binding Edge Options
Select a setting that orients double-sided print binding in the desired direction.
Binding Margin Options
Select options that define a wider margin to allow for binding.
Start Page
Selects whether printing starts on the front or back page.
Create Folded Booklet Options
Select the Booklet checkbox and a binding option to print double-sided pages as a booklet.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Print Density Adjustments - Windows
You can select any of the available options on the Print Density Adjustment window to adjust the print
quality of your double-sided print job.
Print Density
Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing.
Increase Ink Drying Time
Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing
the other side in double-sided printing to prevent ink smearing.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows

You can select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo on the More
Options tab.
119
1. To change the size of your printed document or photo, select the Reduce/Enlarge Document
checkbox and select one of these sizing options:
• Select the Fit to Page option to size your image to fit the paper you loaded. Select the size of your
document or photo as the Document Size setting, and the size of your paper as the Output Paper
setting. If you want to center your image on the paper, select the Center option.
• Select the Zoom to option to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage.
Select the percentage in the % menu.
2. Select one of the following Color Correction options:
• Select Automatic to automatically adjust the sharpness, brightness, contrast, and color saturation
for your image.
• Select Custom and click the Advanced button to manually adjust the color correction settings or
turn off color management in your printer software.
• Select Image Options to access additional settings for improving printed images.
Note: You can also select Color Universal Print settings.
120
3. To add the following features, click the Watermark Features button:
• Anti-Copy Pattern: adds a watermark that only appears when your printout is copied
Note: This setting is not available for all types of printing. Click the Add/Delete button to create
your own pattern, and click the Settings button to customize the pattern.
• Watermark: adds a visible watermark to your printout
Note: Click the Add/Delete button to create your own watermark, and click the Settings button to
customize the watermark.
• Header/Footer: adds information such as the date and time to the top or bottom of your printout
Note: Click the Settings button to customize the text and location of the header or footer.
4. To add a password to your print job, select the Confidential Job checkbox, then enter a password.
Confidential jobs are stored in the product's memory without being printed. To print the job, enter the
password for the confidential job on the product's control panel.
Note: Confidential print jobs are cleared from the product's memory after printing.
5. Select any of the Additional Settings options to customize your print.

Custom Color Correction Options - Windows
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
Related references
Inverted Image
Incorrect Colors
Related tasks
121
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Color Correction window to customize the image colors
for your print job.
Color Controls
Lets you select a Color Mode setting, individual settings for Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and
Density, and individual color tones. Depending on the selected color mode, you can also adjust the
midtone density using the Gamma setting.
Fix Photo
Improves the color, contrast, and sharpness of flawed photos.
Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include
faces. For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo
includes a face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to
retain the special color effects.
122
ICM
Lets you manage color using installed color printing profiles.
No Color Adjustment
Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your
application software.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Image Options and Additional Settings to customize your print. Some options
may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Image Options
Emphasize Text
Adjusts the weight of printed text to increase readability.
Emphasize Thin Lines
Adjusts the weight of printed lines to increase visibility.
Edge Smoothing
Smooths jagged edges in low-resolution images such as screen captures or images from the Web.
Fix Red-Eye
Reduces or removes red-eye in photos.
Print Text in Black
Prints colored text in black.
For Color Text
Prints colored text on a background pattern or underlined.
For Color Graphs and Images
Prints colored graphics and images with overlay patterns.
For Color Text, Graphs, and Images
Prints colored text, graphics, and images with overlay patterns.
Enhancement Options
Specifies Color Universal Print enhancement settings for text, graphics, and images.
Additional Settings Options

Rotate 180º
Prints the image rotated 180º from its original orientation.
123
Bidirectional Printing
Prints in both directions (right-to-left and left-to-right), speeding up printing, but may reduce print
quality.
Mirror Image
Flips the printed image left to right.
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Header/Footer Settings options to add headers or footers when you print. The
items are available to print at the top or bottom of your pages, in either the left, right, or center of the
page.
124
Note: These settings are not saved with your document.
You can select to print the following information:

• User Name
• Computer Name
• Date
• Date/Time
• Document Name
• Collate Number (copy number)
125
• Page Number
• Text
You can also adjust the text settings for the printed information.
Note: The user name, computer name, date, and time come from the Windows Control Panel on your
computer.
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows

For quick access to common groups of print settings, you can select a printing preset on the Main or
More Options tab.
Note: You can create your own preset by clicking the Add/Remove Presets button.
1. Click the Main or More Options tab.
126
You see the available Printing Presets on the left:
2. Place your cursor over one of the Printing Presets to view its list of settings.
3. Click on a preset to change its settings or delete it, or use any of the available options on the screen
to control your printing presets.
4. To choose a preset for printing, select it.
5. Click OK.

You can select additional settings that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
127
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Maintenance tab.
You see the maintenance options:
4. Click the Extended Settings button.
128
5. Select any of the extended settings to customize your print.

6. Click OK to close the Extended Settings window.
7. Click OK to close the printer software window.
Extended Settings - Windows
Related references
Blank Pages Print
Extended Settings - Windows
You can select these settings on the Extended Settings window.
Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3
Enables product monitoring for ink and paper supplies and other issues.
Check Paper Width Before Printing
Prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper if the paper size setting is incorrect; may reduce print
speed.
Thick Paper and Envelopes
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
129
Separator Page
Before each document, prints a separator page containing the title, user, date, and time.
Always Spool RAW Datatype
Increases print speed and may solve other printing problems.
Page Rendering Mode
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing.
Print as Bitmap
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing, and
other settings do not help.
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Change Standard Resolution
Reduces the resolution of print data to correct printing problems.
Refine screening pattern
Prints graphics with a finer screening pattern.
Allow Applications to Perform ICM Color Matching
Allows applications to perform ICM color matching.
Always Use the Driver's Paper Source Setting
Prints using the paper source setting in the printer driver, rather than the setting in your application.
Output 1 page documents facedown in 2-Sided mode
Outputs single-sided pages in a 2-sided print job facedown instead of faceup.
Output documents for filing
Outputs all landscape, portrait, 1-sided, and 2-sided documents in the same orientation for easier
filing.
Barcode mode
Reduces bleeding when printing barcodes on plain paper, letterhead paper, recycled paper,
preprinted paper, envelopes, and thick paper.
Always Use the Driver's Color Setting
Prioritizes color settings from the printer driver software.
Reduce Print Data Size
Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine
patterns.
Print a document with both single-sided and double-sided pages
Prints an entire document that contains both single- and double-sided pages.
130
Parent topic: Selecting Extended Settings - Windows

Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to save your settings and print.
1. Click OK to save your settings.
You see your application's Print window, such as this one:
2. Click OK or Print to start printing.

Related tasks
131
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Windows administrators can lock access to some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes.
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printer properties.
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select
Printer properties.
then right-click your product and select Properties.
Note: You can prevent access to the Optional Settings tab by changing the user or group
permissions in the Security tab.
3. Click Driver Settings.
132
4. Select the checkbox for each setting you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All Document
Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting option you want to use for each locked setting.
6. Click OK.
Locked Setting Options
Locked Setting Options
Select the options you want to use for any locked print settings.
133
Setting Options Description
Anti-Copy Various data items Lets you select the data to use for the pattern or prohibit anti-
Pattern copy patterns
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized anti-copy pattern
Settings Lets you select the arrangement, size, and other settings for
the custom anti-copy pattern
Watermark Various text Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit
watermarks watermarks
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized text or image-based
watermark
Settings Lets you select the size, position, and other watermark
settings
Header/Footer Off Prohibits headers or footers
On Allows headers and footers
Settings Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and
footers
Color Color Allows color printing
Grayscale Allows printing in black or shades of gray only
2-sided printing Off Allows printing on one side of the paper only
On Allows printing on both sides of the paper
Multi-Page Off Prohibits multi-page settings
2-Up Allows printing of 2 pages on one sheet of paper
All Document — Lets you lock all print settings
Settings
134
Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - Windows

If you enabled Access Control on the product, you must enter a user ID and password in the printer
driver to be able to print.
Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . Select Printer Settings and click the
Maintenance tab.
2. Click the Printer and Option Information button.

3. Select the Save Access Control Settings checkbox.
4. Click the Settings button.
135
5. Enter your user name and password.
6. Click OK.
Related tasks
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows

When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
You see the printer settings window:
136
3. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
4. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
You can change the language used on the Windows printer software screens.
You see the printer settings window.
137
You see the maintenance options:
4. Select the language you want to use as the Language setting.

5. Click OK to close the printer software window.
The printer software screens appear in the language you selected the next time you access them.
Parent topic: Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options

Your printer software for Windows automatically checks for updates to the product software. You can
change how often the software checks for updates or disable this feature.
2. Select Software Update Settings.
138

• To change how often the software checks for updates, select a setting in the Check every menu.
• To disable the automatic update feature, select the Never option.
4. Click OK to exit.
Note: If you choose to disable the automatic update feature, you can check for updates manually.
Printing with the Built-in Epson Driver - Windows 10 S

You can print with the built-in Epson printer driver using any printing program on Windows 10 S, as
described in these sections.
Note: The built-in Epson driver in Windows 10 S does not include all the available print settings for your
product.
Selecting Print Settings - Windows 10 S

139
Selecting Print Settings - Windows 10 S
Select the settings for your print job in your Windows 10 S application.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use.
140
4. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Media setting.
for details.
5. Click the Advanced button.

6. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting.
7. To print multiple copies, select or enter the number as the Copy Count setting.
8. To print multiple copies of multi-page documents in sets, select the Collated checkbox.
9. Click OK.
You return to the printing preferences window.
141
10. Select the Layout tab.
11. Select the orientation of your document as the Orientation setting.
142
12. To print double-sided, select one of the Print on Both Sides options, depending on how you want to
orient the page layout. The icon next to each option shows the layout.
13. Click OK to save your settings.

You see your application's Print window.
14. Click OK or Print to start printing.
Parent topic: Printing with the Built-in Epson Driver - Windows 10 S
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac

You can print with your product using any Mac printing program, as described in these sections.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website or using Epson Software Updater.

Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
143
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac

3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
144
You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application
you are using.
5. To use an existing set of print settings, select Presets and choose a preset from the list.
6. Select the Copies and Pages settings as necessary.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing.
145
7. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
8. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image
above for the Preview application.
9. Select Print Settings or Printer Features from the pop-up menu.
You see these settings:
Note: The available print settings and appearance of the print window may be different than those
covered here, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are using.
10. Select the Paper Source you wish to print from.

11. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Media Type setting.
for details.
12. Change the Job Type setting if you want to save the file to the product's hard drive.
13. Select the Print Quality setting you want to use.
14. Select any of the available print options.
146
15. If you want to save your settings as a new printing preset, select Presets and then select Save
current settings as Preset.
Paper Source Options - Mac

Print Quality Options - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Related references
Slanted Printout
Grainy Printout
Incorrect Colors
Related tasks
Paper Source Options - Mac
You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size.
Paper Tray
Selects the paper in the rear feed as the paper source.
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
147
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Print Quality Options - Mac
You can select any of the available Print Quality options to fine-tune the quality of your print. Some
settings may be unavailable, depending on the paper type setting you have chosen.
Draft
For draft printing on plain paper.
Normal
For everyday text and image printing.
Fine
For text and graphics with good quality and print speed.
Best Quality
For the best print quality, but the slowest print speed.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac

Depending on your application, you may be able to select the paper size and orientation settings from
the print window.
148
1. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting.
2. Select the orientation of your document or photo as shown in the print window.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select the icon.
Note: You can reduce or enlarge the size of the printed image by selecting Paper Handling from the
pop-up menu and selecting a scaling option.
Related tasks

You can select a variety of layout options for your document or photo by selecting Layout from the pop-
up menu on the print window.
• To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet
pop-up menu. To arrange the print order of the pages, select a Layout Direction setting.
• To print borders around each page on the sheet, select a line setting from the Border pop-up menu.
• To print on both sides of each page, select a setting from the Two-Sided pop-up menu.
149
• To invert or flip the printed image, select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings.
Related references
Inverted Image

You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting Two-sided Printing Settings from the pop-up
menu on the print window.
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen
or if you are accessing the product over a network. This screen may be different, depending on the Mac
OS version you are using.
1. Select one of the Two-sided Printing options.
150
2. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software
automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
3. If necessary, customize the Adjustments settings as instructed on the screen.

4. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings.
5. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing.
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac
Related references
151
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac
You can select any of the available options in the Two-sided Printing Settings pop-up menu to set up
your double-sided print job.
Long-Edge binding
Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the long edge of the paper.
Short-Edge binding
Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the short edge of the paper.
Print Density
Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing.
Increased Ink Drying Time
Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing
the other side in double-sided printing.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac

You can select printing preferences that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings.
& Supplies.
152
Note: The available settings and appearance of the options window may be different than those
covered here, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are using.
4. Select any of the available printing preferences.

5. Click OK.
Printing Preferences - Mac
Related references
Blank Pages Print
Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select these settings on the Options or Driver tab.
Thick Paper and Envelopes
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Quiet Mode
Lessens noise during printing but may decrease print speed.
153
Permit temporary black printing
Allows you to print using black ink when color ink is expended.
Bidirectional printing
Prints in both directions (right-to-left and left-to-right), speeding up printing, but may reduce print
quality.
Output documents for filing
Outputs all landscape, portrait, 1-sided, and 2-sided documents in the same orientation for easier
filing.
Warning Notifications
Lets you choose whether or not to receive warning notifications from the printer software for various
operating conditions.
Establish bidirectional communication
Allows the product to communicate with the computer. Do not change the default setting unless you
experience issues when using a shared printing pool.
Reduce Print Data Size
Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine
patterns.
Lower Cassette
Specifies whether the optional cassette is present.
Parent topic: Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac

Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to print.
Click Print at the bottom of the print window.
Checking Print Status - Mac

Checking Print Status - Mac
During printing, you can view the progress of your print job, control printing, and check ink status.
1. Click the printer icon when it appears in the Dock.
You see the print status window:
154
2. Select the following options as necessary for your Mac OS version:
• To cancel printing, click the print job and click or Delete.
• To pause a print job, click the print job and click or Hold. To resume a print job, click the
paused print job and click or Resume.
• To pause printing for all queued print jobs, click Pause or Pause Printer.
• To display other printer information, click Settings or Supply Levels.
Parent topic: Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac

Your Epson printer supports native printing on Chromebook, allowing you to print from a Chromebook
without drivers or cables.
For directions on setting up your printer, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (U.S.)
or Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (Canada).
For Latin America, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook.
Related topics
155
You can print from a smartphone or tablet running iOS or Android using the Epson Smart Panel app.
Note: Your device must be connected to the same wireless network as your Epson product, and Epson
Smart Panel must be configured for use with your product.
1. Download the Epson Smart Panel app from your device's app store or from Epson's website. See
the link below.
2. Open the Epson Smart Panel app and select a print menu on the home screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to begin printing.
Related tasks
Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows

You can print with the PCL printer software using any Windows printing program, as described in these
sections (WF-C5890).
Selecting Default Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows

You may need to synchronize the printer driver with the product if the printer driver does not detect the
correct information or settings from the product.
& scanners. Select the PCL driver, then select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select the
PCL driver, and select Manage > Printer properties.
156
Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer
properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the
PCL option, and select Printer properties.
then right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Properties.
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get.

The product's settings and other information appears in the Current Printer Information area.
4. Click OK.
157
Parent topic: Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows
Related tasks

Note: The names of settings on the PCL driver screens may vary slightly, depending on the version of
the driver you have installed.

3. If necessary, select the PCL option of your product as the printer you want to use.
158
You see the Main tab of your printer settings window:
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting.
Note: You can also select the User-Defined setting to create a custom paper size.
6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
159
7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting.
for details.
8. Select any of the available print options.

9. To select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo, select the
More Options tab and select the printing options you want.
10. To select maintenance and other optional settings, select the Maintenance tab and select the
options you want.
Related references
Incorrect Characters Print
Selecting Default Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows

& scanners. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Right-click on
your product, select the PCL option, and select Manage > Printing preferences.
Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printing
preferences.
PCL option, and select Printing preferences.
160
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
3. Click OK.
Locking Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows

Administrators can lock some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes.
161
& scanners. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Right-click on
your product, select the PCL option, and select Manage > Printer properties.
Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer
properties.
PCL option, and select Printer properties.
3. Click Driver Settings.
162
4. Select the checkbox for the settings you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All Document
Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting option you want to use for each locked setting.
6. Click OK.
PCL Driver Locked Setting Options
PCL Driver Locked Setting Options
Select the options you want to use for any locked print settings.

Watermark Various text Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit
watermarks watermarks
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized text or image-based
watermark
Settings Lets you select the size, position, and other watermark
settings
Header/Footer Off Prohibits headers or footers
On Allows headers and footers
Settings Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and
footers
Color Color Allows color printing
Grayscale Allows printing in black or shades of gray only
2-sided printing Off Allows printing on only one side of the paper
On Allows printing on both sides of the paper
163
Multi-Page Off Prohibits multi-page settings
Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows

You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Windows printing program, as
described in these sections (WF-C5890).
Selecting Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows

3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use, and then click the
Preferences or Propertiesbutton, depending on the application.
164
You see the Paper/Quality tab of your printer settings window:
4. Select the Paper Source that matches where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select Plain as the Media setting.
6. Select one of the following as the Color setting:
• To print text and graphics in black only, select the Black & White setting.
7. To select additional PostScript layout and printing options, select Advanced and select additional
8. Select the Layout tab.
165
9. Select any settings as necessary.

10. If you have set up Access Control or want to print a confidential job, select Extended Settings to
enable printing by entering a user name and password , or print a confidential job by entering the
necessary information.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Related references
166
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
& scanners. Right-click on your product and select Printer properties.
product name and select Manage > Printing preferences.
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Print Preferences.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select
Printing Preferences.
right-click your product name, and select Printing Preferences.
167
3. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac

You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Mac printing program, as described in
these sections (WF-C5890).
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
168
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac

The PostScript printer software supports plain paper printing on these paper and envelope sizes:
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
• Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
print window.
169
You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
you are using.
5. Select the Two-Sided, Copies, and Pages settings as necessary.
printing.
6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
170
7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image
above for the Preview application.
8. Select Paper Feed from the pop-up menu.
171
9. Select All Pages From or First Page From and select the paper source you want to print from.
10. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu.
11. Select Plain as the Media Type setting.

12. Select one of the following Print Quality options:
• For fast printing with reduced quality, select Fast.
• For printing text and graphics with good quality and print speed, select Fine.
• For the best printing with reduced speed, select Maximum.
13. Select Color > from the Feature Sets pop-up menu.
172
14. Select a Color Mode option:
• To print text and graphics in black only, select the Monochrome setting.
15. Select any of the following from the pop-up menu as necessary:
• Select Layout to adjust a variety of layout options for your document or photo.
• Select Paper Handling to adjust the size of the image as you print it.
• Select Color Matching to fine-tune the colors in your printout.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button

If you need to cancel printing, press the cancel button.
173
Scanning
You can scan your originals and save them as digital files.
Starting a Scan
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Related tasks
Starting a Scan
After placing your originals on your product for scanning, start scanning using one of these methods.
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Parent topic: Scanning

You can scan an image to a variety of destinations using your product's control panel.
1. Make sure you installed the product software and connected the product to your computer or
network.
Note: Restart your computer after installing the product software to enable scanning from the control
panel.
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place your originals in the ADF.
174
4. Select Scan.
5. Select one of the following Scan to options:
• Network Folder/FTP saves your scanned file to a specified folder on a network.
• Email lets you send scanned files through a pre-configured email server.
• Computer lets you scan to a connected computer using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or
Document Capture (Mac).
• Memory Device saves your scanned file on a USB device and lets you select the file format,
quality, and other settings.
• Cloud sends your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with Epson Connect.
• WSD lets you manage network scanning in Windows 10, Windows 8.x, Windows 7, or Windows
Vista (English only). To use this feature, you must first set up a WSD (Web Services for Devices)
port on your Windows 7 or Windows Vista computer (the port is set up automatically on Windows
10 and Windows 8.x).
6. Follow the instructions in the links below to complete your scan.
Scanning to Email
Scanning to a Connected Computer
Scanning to the Cloud
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7/Windows Vista)
Control Panel Scanning Options
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Related references
Related tasks
Using Presets
Related topics
Scanning to Email
You can scan an original and email the scanned file using your product's control panel. You need to
have a preconfigured email server before you can scan to email. You can enter email addresses directly
175
on the product's control panel or select them from the Recipient tab. Make sure the date and time are
set correctly so the time stamps on your emails are accurate.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.

3. Select Scan.
4. Select Email.
• Select an email address from any of the displayed frequent contacts.
• Select Keyboard to use the on-screen keyboard to enter the email address for the recipient(s)
and select OK.
• Select Contacts and choose an email address from the list.
• Select History to choose an email address from your recent scan history.
6. Select Scan Settings.
7. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan.
8. Scroll down to change the Subject and File Name, if necessary.
9. Select any additional scan settings as necessary.
10. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
11. Select Send.

Your product scans your original and emails the scanned file.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related tasks
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel
176
Related topics
Scanning to a Connected Computer
You can scan an original and save it to a connected computer using your product's control panel. The
computer must be on the same network as the product and must have the Document Capture Pro
Server software installed. The product must also be configured for Document Capture Pro Server.
You can save the scanned file as a PDF file. You can also set up custom scan settings using Document
Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) and automatically scan using those settings on your
product control panel.
Note: To scan a multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.

3. Select Scan.
4. Select Computer.
5. Select Select Computer to choose a computer to scan to, and select it when it appears.
Note: The computer you want to scan to must be on the same network as the product or connected
to the product with a USB cable.
The Select Job screen appears:

6. Select one of the scan job options.
Note: The default scan job is Scan to PDF. Any additional scan job options must be added in
Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac).
7. Select Save.
Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) scans the original to the connected
computer.
177
You can scan an original and save the scanned image to a external USB device connected to your
product.
1. Insert an external USB device into the product's USB port.

4. Select Scan.
5. Select Memory Device.
6. Select the settings as necessary.
8. Select Save.
Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the connected memory device.
Related tasks
Connecting a USB Device
Related topics
Scanning to the Cloud
You can use the control panel to send your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with
Epson Connect.
Note: Make sure to set up your product using Epson Connect before using this feature.
178

3. Select Scan.
4. Select Cloud.
5. Select the + icon and select a cloud destination.
6. Select the settings as necessary.
8. Select Upload.
Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the selected destination.
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7/Windows Vista)
You can scan to a networked Windows computer using WSD (Web Services for Devices). You must first
set up a WSD port on your Windows 7 or Windows Vista system (the port is set up automatically on
Windows 11, Windows 10 and Windows 8.x).
Before you set up a WSD port, make sure you installed your product software, and connected your
product and computer to the same network.
1. Turn on your product.
2. Print a network status sheet so you can identify the network name and model name for your product
on the network.
3. Click or Start and select Computer.

4. On the left side of the window, select Network.
5. Locate your product on the Network screen, right-click it, and select Install.
179
6. When you see the User Account Control screen, click Continue.
Note: If you see an Uninstall screen, click Uninstall and repeat these steps as necessary.
7. When you see the message Your device is ready to use in the Windows taskbar, click the
message.
8. On the Driver Software Installation screen, make sure your product is listed as Ready to use. Then
click Close.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers.

• Windows Vista: Click Start and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
10. Make sure that an icon appears for your product's name on the network.
When you use WSD, select your product name to scan over the network.
Select the options you want to use for scanning.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the Scan to option selected.
Scan Settings Available options Description

Color Mode B&W Select to scan images in black and white
Color Select to scan images in color
File Format JPEG Select for photos. You can also select the
Compression Ratio.
PDF (Single Page) Select for documents. You can also select the
Compression Ratio and PDF Settings.
PDF (Multi Page)
PDF/A (Single Page)
PDF/A (Multi Page)
TIFF (Single Page) Select for scanned files that you can print from a
device. Multi Page TIFF documents are scanned
TIFF (Multi Page)
in black and white.
180
Scan Settings Available options Description
Resolution 200dpi Select for documents
300dpi Select for photos
600dpi Select for highest quality printing
2-Sided 1-Sided Lets you scan 2-sided originals placed in the
ADF. If you select 2-Sided, you can also select
2-Sided
the Orientation (Original) and the Binding
(Original).
Scan Area Auto Cropping Select to automatically adjust the scan area
Various sizes Select the page size for documents
Max Area Select for most photos
Original Type Text Specify the type of original you are scanning
Text & Image
Photo
Orientation (Original) Readable Direction Select the orientation direction for how you
placed the originals
Left Direction
Density Varying levels Adjust the lightness or darkness of scanned
images.
Remove Shadow Off Erase the shadows that appear in the center of a
document when copying a book or the shadows
On
that appear around a document when copying
thick paper
Remove Punch Holes Off Erase the binding holes on a document
On
Subject — Enter a subject for your email
Attached File Max Size Various sizes Select the maximum file size that can be
attached to an email
File Name — Enter a prefix, the date, and the time to the file
name for your scanned file
181
Related references

Before you can scan to a network folder on your computer or on an FTP server, you need to create a
shared folder and optionally register its location to your product's Contacts list. Select the links below as
necessary to create and register the folder, and to scan to it over the network.
Creating a Shared Network Folder
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config
Related references
Creating a Shared Network Folder
You can create a shared network folder on your computer or an FTP site and register its location to your
product's Contacts list.
Note: If you are creating a shared network folder on a Mac, see your Mac documentation for instructions
on creating the folder. The instructions here are for Windows.
First make sure you connected your product and computer to the same network.
Note: If you are running a Home version of the Windows operating system, you cannot create a shared
folder on your Windows desktop or in the Documents or Pictures folder unless you have created a Home
Group Configuration for sharing. You can, however, create a shared folder in the root of the C: drive on
your system.
If you want to scan to a folder on an FTP server, contact the FTP server administrator for the server
address and authentication access to a shared folder on the server.
1. If you are scanning to a network folder on your computer, do one of the following to check the format
of your computer name:
• Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Hold down the Windows key on your keyboard and
press the X key. Select System from the list that appears. Check the Computer Name or Device
Name listed for your computer on the System window.
182
• Windows 7: Click , right-click Computer, and select Properties. Check the Computer Name
listed for your computer on the System window.
Note: The settings in these steps may vary, depending on your version of Windows. See Windows
Help for details on your operating system.
2. If the computer's name uses any characters that are not alphanumeric (letters or numbers), do one
of the following to change the computer's name:
• Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Select Rename this PC and follow the on-screen
prompts.
• Windows 7: Select Change Settings, change the computer's name, and click OK. (See Windows
Help for instructions, if necessary.)
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to change the computer's name.
After changing the name, restart your computer.
3. Start File Explorer or Windows Explorer.

4. Create a folder on the Windows desktop with a folder name of 12 characters or less; otherwise, your
product may not be able to access the folder.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to access the desktop folder and the
document folder under each User folder.
5. Right-click the folder you created and select Properties.

6. On the General tab, deselect the Read-only checkbox to allow users to access the folder over the
network.
7. Select the Sharing tab and click the Advanced Sharing button.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to select the Advanced Sharing
button.
8. On the Advanced Sharing screen, select the Share this folder checkbox.
9. Click the Permissions button and select the following on the Share Permissions tab:
• Select Everyone under Group or user names.
• Select the checkbox in the Allow column for the Change setting.
183
10. Click OK to save the settings, then click OK again to close the Advanced Sharing window.
11. Select the Security tab and check that the Group or user names list at the top includes the current
computer user and the administrators who can now access the folder.
12. Select the Sharing tab again and write down the Network Path listed under Network File and Folder
Sharing at the top. This is the path you will register to your product's Contacts list so you can select it
for network scanning.
13. Click OK or Close.
Now you can register the folder path to your product's Contacts list.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config
You can register a list of contacts for scanning to a network folder or FTP server using Web Config and
your computer's internet browser.
Before you begin, print a network status sheet and locate the IP address for your product on the sheet.
1. Start an internet browser on a computer that is using the same network as your product.
2. Type your product's IP address into the address bar and press Enter.
3. Click Continue to this website (not recommended).
4. Click the Scan/Copy tab.
5. Click Contacts.
6. Select an empty number you want to use for the contact you are adding and click Edit.
7. Enter the following information for the contact:
• Name: The name to display in your product's contact list.
• Index Word: Enter a word to identify this entry when searching for it (up to 30 characters). This
field is optional.
• Type: Select Network Folder (SMB) or FTP.
• Assign to Frequent Use: If you want to identify the contact as a frequently used address, select
On. This makes it quicker to select the contact when you scan.
• Save to: The network path to the shared folder.
Enter the folder path name in one of the following formats depending on the Type setting you
selected:
• SMB: host_name\folder
184
• FTP: host_name/folder_name
• Secure Connection: For FTP locations, select the secure connection type.
• User Name and Password: Enter only if you have set up a password on your computer.
• Connection Mode: For FTP locations, select Passive Mode if there is a firewall between the
product and FTP server.
• Port Number: For FTP locations, enter the port number.
• Certificate Validation: For FTP locations, choose to enable or disable an imported certificate.
8. Click Apply.
After a moment, you see a message telling you that contact registration is complete.
9. Close your web browser.
You can create a list of contacts for scanning to email or to a network folder or FTP.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
your administrator for assistance. You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined
(including fax contacts).

2. Select Settings > Contacts Manager > Register/Delete.
3. Select Add Entry.
4. Select Add Contact.
• To create a contact for scanning to fax, select Fax.
• To create a contact for scanning to email, select Email.
• To create a location for scanning to a network folder or FTP, select Network Folder/FTP.
6. Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
7. Select the Name field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters)
and select OK.
8. Select the Index Word field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters) and select OK. (This field is optional.)
185
• For a fax contact, select the Enter Fax Number field. Use the displayed keyboard to enter the fax
number and select OK.
Select any other fax settings as necessary.
• For an email contact, select the Email Address (Required) field. Use the on-screen keyboard to
enter the address and select OK.
• For a network folder or FTP location, select the Communication Mode field and select an option.
Then select the Location (Required) field, use the on-screen keyboard to enter the location, and
select OK. Enter other information if necessary.
Enter the folder path name for the location setting in one of the following formats depending on the
Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
10. Select OK.
Note: If you need to edit or delete scanning contacts, the procedures are the same as for fax contacts.

Related tasks
Scanning to Email
You can scan an image and save it to a network folder using your product's control panel. You can either
enter the folder path directly on the product's control panel or select a folder from the Destination tab.
Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place your originals in the ADF.

3. Select Scan.
4. Select Network Folder/FTP.
186

• Choose a saved location on the Destination tab.
• Select Keyboard, select the Communication Mode field, and select Network Folder (SMB) or
FTP. Then select the Location (Required) field, enter the folder location, and select OK. Enter
other information as necessary.
Enter the folder path name for the location setting in one of the following formats depending on the
Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
• Select an email address from any displayed frequent contacts.
6. Select Scan Settings.
7. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan.
8. Scroll down to select File Name and change it if necessary.
9. Select any additional scan settings as necessary.
187
11. Select Save.

Your product scans your original and saves it in the selected location.
Related tasks
Related topics

You can start the Epson Scan 2 program to select scan settings, scan, and save the scanned image to a
file.
Store.
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Scan 2 and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Epson Scan 2.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select EPSON
> Epson Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2.
• Mac: Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Epson Scan 2.
188
You see an Epson Scan 2 window like this:
189
Related references
Related tasks
Related topics

You can start Epson Scan 2 from a TWAIN-compliant scanning program to select scan settings, scan,
and open the scanned image in the program.
Store.
1. Open your scanning program and select its scanning option. (See your scanning program help for
instructions.)
2. Select your product.
Note: In certain programs, you may need to select your product as the "source" first. If you see a
Select Source option, choose it and select your product. With Windows, do not select a WIA option
for your product; not all scan functions will be available.
190

Related tasks
191
Related topics

You can use the Epson Smart Panel app to scan from a network scanner to an iOS or Android device
over a direct Wi-Fi connection.
1. Download the Epson Smart Panel app from your device's app store or from Epson's website. See
the link below.
3. Open the Epson Smart Panel app and select a scan menu on the home screen.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to scan and save your original.
Related tasks
Related topics

Epson Scan 2 gives you access to basic and advanced scanning features. You can scan your document
and save the scanned image in various file formats in your operating system's Documents or My
Documents folder, or open it in your scanning program. You can preview the scanned image and select
or change settings as necessary.
Store.
1. Start Epson Scan 2.
192
2. Select the Document Source setting that matches where you placed your original, or select Auto
Detect to have Epson Scan 2 automatically detect the source.
3. Select the Scanning Side setting if you are scanning from the ADF.
4. Select the Document Size setting that matches the size of your original. You can select Customize
to enter a custom size, if necessary.
193
5. Select the image type of your original and how you want it scanned as the Image Type setting.
6. Select the Resolution setting you want to use for your scan.
7. Select the Rotate setting to rotate the scanned image.
8. Select the Correct Document Skew setting to correct skewed originals, image contents, or both.
9. Click the Preview button.
Epson Scan 2 previews your original and displays the results in the Epson Scan 2 window.
10. Reinsert your original into the ADF, if necessary.

11. Select any of the additional settings that you want to use on the Main Settings tab.
12. Click the Advanced Settings tab and select any settings that you want to use.
13. Select the format in which you want to save your scanned file as the Image Format setting. If
necessary, select Options and select any desired format options.
14. Enter the file name for your scanned file in the File Name field. If necessary, select Settings to
modify the file name settings.
15. Select the location in which you want to save your scanned file as the Folder setting. If necessary,
select Select to create a new folder.
16. Click Scan.
194
The product scans your original and saves the scanned file in the location you specified.
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
Image Format Options
Scan Resolution Guidelines
Related topics

You can select these additional scanning settings on the Epson Scan 2 Main Settings tab. Not all
adjustment settings may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Stitch Images
When scanning double-sided originals, lets you lay out images from both sides of the original onto
one scanned page.
Rotate
Rotates the original image clockwise to the desired angle before scanning it. Select Auto to allow
your product to automatically rotate the image based on the orientation of the text (may take longer to
scan).
Correct Document Skew
Corrects skewed originals, image contents, or both.
Add or edit pages after scanning
Lets you add, remove, or edit the pages in a scan, including rotating pages and changing the page
order.
Note: To save multiple pages in a single file, you must select a file format that supports multiple
pages such as PDF or Multi-TIFF. If you select another file format, each scanned image or page is
saved as a separate file.
Skip Blank Pages

If the scanner detects marks from the other side of a blank page and adds the marks to the scanned
image, adjust this setting to prevent this.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
195
Related references
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image

You can select these additional scanning settings on the Epson Scan 2 Advanced Settings tab. Not all
adjustment settings may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Remove Background
Removes the background of the originals.
Text Enhancement
Sharpens the appearance of letters in text documents.
Auto Area Segmentation
Makes black and white images clearer and text recognition more accurate by separating the text from
the graphics.
Threshold
Adjusts the level at which black areas in text and line art are delineated, improving text recognition in
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) programs.
Color Enhance
Enhances the shades of the color you select in the scanned image. This setting is available only if you
select Grayscale or Black & White as the Image Type setting.
Brightness
Adjusts the overall lightness and darkness of the scanned image.
Contrast
Adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of the overall scanned image.
Gamma
Adjusts the midtone density of the scanned image.
Sharpness
Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer. Turn off this option to leave softer edges.
Descreening
Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas, such as skin tones. This
option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers. (The results of descreening do not
appear in the preview image, only in your scanned image.)
Edge Fill
Corrects shadowing around the edges of the image by filling the shadows with black or white.
196
Dual Image Output
Scans the original image twice using different output settings (Windows only).
Watermark
Adds a watermark to a scanned image.
Related references

You can scan a document and save the text in a searchable PDF. In a searchable PDF, text is
recognized using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and then embedded in the scanned original.
Note: The required Epson Scan 2 OCR Component is installed automatically when you install your
product software as instructed on the Start Here sheet. If you install your scanner software programs
individually, be sure to also install this component if you want to perform OCR.
1. Load your original in the product for scanning.

3. Select your scan settings.
4. Click Preview and adjust the area you want to scan, if necessary.
5. If you are using the ADF, reload the ejected original.
6. Select Searchable PDF as the Image Format setting.
7. Select Options from the Image Format list.
197
8. Select any of the options on the General tab.

9. Select the Text tab.
10. Make sure the language used in the document text is selected as the Text Language setting.
11. Select the Security tab if you want to add a password to the PDF or protect printing or editing
properties.
12. Click OK.
13. Confirm the File Name setting and select a Folder setting for your document.
14. Click Scan.
The scanned image is saved as a searchable PDF.
Related topics
198
Image Format Options
You can select different image formats and related options. For details on available options, click the ?
icon on the Epson Scan 2 Image Format Options window. Not all image formats have options.
BITMAP (*.bmp)
A standard image file format for most Windows programs.
JPEG (*.jpg)
An image format that lets you highly compress image data. However, the higher the compression, the
lower the image quality. (The TIFF format is recommended when you need to modify or retouch your
scanned image.)
PNG (*.png)
An image format that does not lose quality during editing.
TIFF (*.tif)
A file format created for exchanging data between many programs, such as graphic and DTP
software.
Multi-TIFF (*.tif)
A TIFF file format when multiple pages are saved to the same file, allowing you to edit the images
using a compatible program.
PDF (*.pdf)
A document format that is readable by Windows and Mac systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or
other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file.
Searchable PDF (*.pdf)
A document format that is readable by Windows and Mac systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or
other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file. Recognized text in the scanned
document can be searched.

The Resolution setting, measured in dpi (dots per inch), controls the amount of detail captured in your
scans. Increasing the resolution raises the amount of detail captured but comes with the following
disadvantages:
• Larger file sizes
• It takes longer to scan your originals, send/receive your scans by email or fax, and to print your scans
• The image may become too large to fit on your display or print on paper
199
If you plan to enlarge a scanned image so you can print it at a larger size, you may need to increase the
resolution from the default resolution set by Epson Scan 2. Follow these guidelines to determine the
resolution setting you need:
• You will scan the image at its original size but enlarge it later in an image-editing program.
Increase the Epson Scan 2 Resolution setting in your scan. Increase the resolution by the same
amount you will increase the image size to retain a high image quality. For example, if the resolution is
300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the image size later, change the Resolution setting to 600
dpi.
• You will scan the image at 100% or a smaller size.
Select the Epson Scan 2 Resolution setting based on how you will use the scanned image:
• Email/view on a computer screen/post on the web: 96 to 200 dpi
• Print/fax/convert to editable text (OCR)/create searchable PDF: 200 to 300 dpi
Related references
Cannot Scan Over a Network

When you scan with Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac), the program
automatically saves your scanned file on your computer in the folder you specify. You can preview and
edit the scanned file, change the scanned file settings, and send to a destination if necessary.
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
Related topics
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows

You can use the Simple Scan option in Document Capture Pro to quickly scan an original.
200
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your original in the product.

2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: You may need to select your scanner from the list, if necessary.
3. Select the Simple Scan tab.

4. Select the size of your original from the Document Size menu.
201
5. If you want to change specific settings for the scan, click the Scan Settings button. Change any of
the settings as necessary and click OK. For additional settings, click the Detailed Settings button
on the Scan Settings screen.
• To scan the front side of an original, select SCAN single-sided.
• To scan both sides of an original, select SCAN double-sided.
Your product scans the original and the image appears in the Edit Scanned Results window.
7. Review and edit the scanned image as necessary and click Next when you are finished.
8. Select a destination for the scanned image, change any settings as necessary, and click Complete.
Note: If you are sending the scanned image to a server or cloud destination, you need to enter your
login information.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows

You can create scan jobs in Document Capture Pro and use them to quickly scan originals and save
them to various destinations.

Note: You may need to select your scanner from the list, if necessary.
202
3. Select the Job Scan tab.
4. Select one of the scan jobs (or click Job Settings to create a new scan job).
The product scans the loaded original and saves it according to the job settings.
5. Depending on the settings for the scan job you selected, you may be able to view and edit the pages
before saving them. If so, click Complete when finished.
The scanned image is saved according to the job settings.
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can add scan jobs that contain specific scan settings and use the jobs when you scan from your
product control panel or the Job Scan option in Document Capture Pro. You can save up to 30 scan
jobs.
203
3. Click the Job Settings button.
204
4. To add a scan job, click the New Job icon.

5. Enter a name for the new job, and select any settings as necessary from the following options:
• Scan: select the size, color, or resolution
• Save: select the file name, file type, or destination folder
• Index: enable the index setting and choose output options for an index file
• Send: select the destination for the scanned file, or choose to email or print the file
• Confirm/Test: select the job button icon and color, choose display settings, and run a test scan if
necessary
6. Click Save when you are finished.
The new job appears in the Job Scan window.
7. To assign a scan job to the product control panel, click the Button Assignment icon.
205
8. Select the jobs that you want to assign to the product control panel using any of the pull-down
menus.
Note: The number of pull-down menus available may vary, depending on your product and any
connected options.
9. Click OK, then click Back.

You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows

You can scan both sides of a double-sided or folded original in Document Capture Pro and combine
them into a single image with the Epson Scan 2 Stitch Images setting (not available for all products).
206
Note: If an optional carrier sheet is included with your product, use it when scanning a folded original
or damage to the original may occur. Place the original into the carrier sheet with the folded edge
against the right side of the carrier sheet. Make sure to insert the carrier sheet into your product with
the white edge facing down.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start and select All Programs or Programs. Select
3. Select the Simple Scan tab.
4. Click Scan Settings > Detailed Settings.
207
208
5. Select Double-Sided as the Scanning Side setting.
6. Select the original document size or Auto Detect as the Document Size setting.
7. Select one of the following as the Stitch Images setting:
• Top & Bottom: Places the scanned images one above the other.
• Left & Right: Places the scanned images side by side.
8. Select the Advanced Settings tab and verify that the Edge Fill setting is set to None.
9. Click Save.
10. Click OK.
11. Click SCAN double-sided.
Your product scans the original and the image appears in the Edit Scanned Results window.
Note: If the scanned images are not stitched together in the correct orientation, click Scanning Side
on the Epson Scan 2 window, select Settings, set the Binding Edge to Left or Top, and rescan the
document.
12. Review and edit the scanned pages as necessary and click Next when you are finished.
13. Select a destination and any settings as necessary and click Complete.
Related topics

You can use Document Capture Pro to scan multi-page originals as separate scanned files. You can
indicate how the separate files are created by defining a maximum page count per file or by inserting
blank pages, barcodes, or characters that can be detected by the software as separation markers.
1. Load your multi-page original in the product.

209
4. Click the Job Settings button.

210
5. Select New Job and select the scan settings. Click Next when finished.
6. Select the Apply job separation checkbox.

7. Select the method you want to use to separate the originals as the Separator setting. Click
Separation Settings to specify the settings for the selected option.
211
8. Finish creating the new scan job and click Save.
9. Click Back on the Job Settings screen.
Your originals are saved into separate files and folders as specified when the job is run.
Related topics

When you scan with Document Capture, the program automatically saves your scanned file on your
computer in the folder you specify. You can select settings, preview, and change the scanned file
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. See the Help menu in
Document Capture at any time for more information.

2. Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Document Capture.
212
Note: You may need to select your scanner from the scanner list.
3. Click the scan icon.

Note: If you want to use a scan job that you created instead, select it from the Job list in the
Document Capture window, click the Start Job button, and skip the rest of these steps.
4. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use.
Note: See the Help information in Document Capture for details.
5. If you want to select detailed scan settings, close the Scan Settings window, open the Scan menu at
the top of the Mac desktop, and select Displays the EPSON Scan Setup Screen.
213
6. Click the Scan icon and select any detailed scan settings you want to use from the Epson Scan 2
window.
7. Click Scan.
You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture window.
Note: You may have to close the Epson Scan 2 window to view your scan in the Document Capture
window.
8. If you would like to scan additional originals and add them to the current captured images, click the +
icon, select Acquire from Scanner, and repeat the previous steps.
9. Check the scanned images and edit them as necessary.
10. Click one of the destination icons to choose where to send your scanned files. (If you cannot see all
of the icons below, click the arrow next to the icons.) Change any settings as necessary.
Note: If you are sending the scanned image to a server or cloud destination, you need to enter your
login information.
214
11. Depending on the destination you chose, click OK or Send to complete the operation.
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac
Related topics
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac
You can add scan jobs that contain specific scan settings and use the jobs when you scan from your
product control panel or Document Capture. You can save up to 30 scan jobs.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. See the Help menu in
Document Capture at any time for more information.
1. Start Document Capture on a computer connected to the product.
2. Click the Manage Job icon from the toolbar at the top of the window.
You see a window showing the current scan job list.
3. To add a scan job, click the + icon, enter a name for the new job, select settings as necessary, and
click OK.
You can now use the new scan job when you scan with Document Capture.
4. To assign a scan job to the product control panel, click the settings icon at the bottom of the
window and click Event Settings.
5. Select the jobs that you want to assign to the product control panel using any of the pull-down
menus.
Note: The number of pull-down menus available may vary, depending on your product and any
connected options.
6. Click OK, then click OK again.

You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture - Mac
215
If you enabled Access Control on your product, a user ID and password may be required to scan. You
can enter the user ID and password in Epson Scan 2.
Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.

2. Select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
3. Select Access Control.

4. Enter your user name and password.
5. Click OK.
Related tasks
216
Faxing
See these sections to fax using your product.
Note: This product allows you to store names, telephone numbers, and fax data in its memory even
when the power is turned off. Make sure you restore all of the default settings if you give away or dispose
of the product. This will erase all of your network settings and fax data.
Note: When using the PCL or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product, you can fax using the
printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software. To download the
standard Epson printer software,visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
epson.com.jm/support (Caribbean) and select your product.
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine

Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Sending Faxes
Receiving Faxes
Checking Fax Status
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box)
Printing Fax Reports
Related tasks

You must connect your product to a telephone wall jack to send or receive faxes. If you want to use the
same telephone line to receive calls, you can connect a telephone or answering machine to your product
using an additional phone cable.
Note: You may not be able to use the printer with the following phone lines or systems:
• VoIP phone line such as DSL or fiber-optic digital service
• Digital phone line (ISDN)
• Some PBX telephone systems
217
• When adapters such as terminal adapters, VoIP adapters, splitters, or DSL router are connected
between the telephone wall jack and the printer
218
1. Connect a phone cable to your telephone wall jack and to the LINE port on your product.
Note: If you have a DSL or ISDN connection, you must connect the appropriate DSL filter, or ISDN
terminal adapter or router to the wall jack to be able to use the line for faxing or voice calls using your
product. Contact your DSL or ISDN provider for the necessary equipment.
219
2. If you are connecting a telephone or answering machine to your product using a second phone
cable, remove the cap from the EXT port on your product.
Note: If your telephone has a fax function, disable the fax function before connecting it. If you are not
able to completely disable the fax function on your telephone, you may not be able to use it as an
external telephone.
220
3. Connect a second phone cable to your telephone or answering machine and to the EXT port on your
product.
Note: If you connect an answering machine and Receive Mode is set to Auto, set the number of
rings before your product answers a call to a number that is higher than your answering machine's
setting for the number of rings.
Make sure to connect the telephone to the EXT port on your product. If you split the telephone line
between your telephone and the product, they will not work correctly.
Parent topic: Faxing

Related references
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
Related tasks
Receiving Faxes Automatically
Using the Fax Setup Wizard
221
Setting Up Fax Features
Before faxing with your product, set up your fax header and select the fax features you want to use.
Note: If you leave your product unplugged for a long period of time, you may need to reset the date and
time settings for faxes.
Setting Up Basic Fax Features

Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac
Setting Up Basic Fax Features

See these sections to select the basic settings you need to use the product's fax features.
Selecting the Line Type
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
You can setup the product's basic fax settings using the Fax Setting Wizard. This wizard is automatically
displayed when the product is turned on for the first time. You can also change these settings individually
from the Fax Settings menu.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change these setting,

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Setting Wizard.
222
3. Select Proceed.
4. On the Fax Header screen, use the displayed keypad to enter the sender name for your fax source,
such as your name or a business name. You can enter up to 40 characters. Select OK when you are
done.
5. On the Your Phone Number screen, use the displayed keypad to enter your fax number, up to 20
characters. Select OK when you are done.
Note: The name and phone number in the fax header identifies the source of the faxes you send.
6. On the Distinctive Ring Setting screen, do one of the following:

• If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, select Proceed.
Select the ring pattern to be used for incoming faxes or select All. Go to the next step.
• If you do not have a distinctive ring service, select Skip and go to step 9.
Note: Distinctive ring services allows you to have several phone numbers on one phone line. Each
number is assigned a different ring pattern. You can use one number for voice calls and another for
fax calls. Select the ring pattern assigned to fax calls in the DRD Setting. If you select a ring pattern
other than All, Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto.
223
7. On the Receive Mode Setting screen, do one of the following:
• If you have connected an external telephone or answering machine to the product, select Yes and
go to the next step.
• If you did not connect an external telephone or answering machine, select No and go to step 9.
(Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto; otherwise you cannot receive faxes.)
8. On the next Receive Mode Setting screen, select Yes to receive faxes automatically or select No to
receive faxes manually.
Note: If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make
sure the Rings to Answer setting is correct. If you select to receive faxes manually, you need to
answer every call and operate the product’s control panel or your phone to receive faxes.
9. On the Proceed screen, confirm the displayed settings and select Proceed, or press the back arrow
to change the settings.
10. On the Run Check Fax Connection screen, select Start Checking and follow the on-screen
instructions to check the fax connection and print a report of the check result. If there are any errors
reported, try the solutions on the report and run the check again.
If the Select Line Type screen appears, select the correct line type.
If the Dial Tone Detection screen appears, select Disable. However, disabling the dial tone detection
function may drop the first digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Related tasks
If you connect the product to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter, you must change the product's
line type. PBX (Private Branch Exchange) is used in office environments where an external access code
such as “9” must be dialed to call an outside line. The default Line Type setting is PSTN (Public Switched
Telephone Network), which is a standard home phone line.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Line Type > PBX.
224
3. Select Access Code.

4. Select Use.
5. Select the Access Code field.
6. Use the displayed keypad to enter the access code, such as 9, and select OK.
Related tasks
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer
If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make sure the
Rings to Answer setting is correct. The number of rings should be higher than the number of rings your
answering machine is set to for answering a call.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rings to Answer.
225
3. Select the number of rings and select OK. Make sure to select a number higher than the number of
rings your answering machine is set to for answering a call.
Note: An answering machine picks up every call faster than the product, but the product can detect fax
tones and start receiving faxes. If you answer the phone and hear a fax tone, check that the product has
started receiving the fax, then hang up the phone.
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings

You can select a variety of advanced fax settings.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change these setting,

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings.
226
3. Select the group of settings you want to change.

Send Settings - Fax
Receive Settings - Fax
Report Settings - Fax
Security Settings - Fax
Set the basic options you want to use for incoming and outgoing faxes.
Note: If the optional fax board is installed on your product, the Expansion Line Settings menu appears.
You can select certain settings below for each added line.

Fax Speed Fast(33,600bps) Sets the speed at which you send and receive faxes.
Medium(14,400bps)
Slow(9,600bps)
227
ECM On Turns on Error Correction Mode (ECM) to
automatically correct errors in sent or received fax
data.
Off Turns off Error Correction Mode (ECM); color faxes
cannot be sent or received.
Dial Tone Detection On Automatically dials the number you enter for faxing
when the product detects a dial tone.
Off Turns off automatic dial tone detection, which may
be necessary if the product is connected to a PBX
(Private Branch Exchange) or a TA (Terminal
Adapter). However, turning this setting off may cause
the product to drop the first digit of a fax number.
Line Type PSTN Selects a standard phone line (Public Switched
Telephone Network).
PBX Selects Private Branch Exchange, the type of phone
line used in office environments where an access
code such as 9 must be used to call an outside line.
Header Your Phone Select to enter the header information and your
Number phone number for inclusion on outgoing faxes.
Fax Header
Receive Mode Manual Lets you confirm whether an incoming fax should be
printed; a telephone must be connected to the
product
Auto Automatically receives and prints faxes.
Distinctive Ring All If you are using a Distinctive Ring Service on your
phone line, your telephone company can assign two
Single
or more phone numbers to the same line and assign
Double different ring patterns to each. If you use this service,
select the number of rings for your fax number so
Triple
your product can receive faxes on the correct
Double&Triple number of rings. Select All for phones lines that do
not use this service.
228
Rings to Answer 1 to 9 Sets the number of rings before your product
receives a fax. If Receive Mode is set to Auto and an
answering machine is connected to the product,
make sure this setting is set higher than the number
of rings your answering machine is set to answer a
call.
Remote Receive Off Lets you start receiving faxes using your phone
instead of operating the product (if the Receive Mode
On
is set to Auto). When you select On, you must also
Start Code set a Start Code. If you are using a cordless handset
with its base connected to the product, you can start
receiving the fax by entering the code using the
handset.
Rejection Fax Various Lets you automatically reject faxes from blocked
numbers, with blank headers, or from unrecognized
contacts.
Save/Forward File PDF Saves or forwards a fax as a PDF file. You can also
Format set a password for opening the PDF or allowing
printing and editing permissions.
TIFF Saves or forwards a fax as a TIFF file.
Cloud Destination List Various Allows user to register up to five addresses at a
cloud service recognized by Epson Connect.
Received faxes may be forwarded to the selected
cloud service. To use this feature, the printer must be
registered with Epson Connect.
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings

Related references
Fax Quality is Poor
Related tasks
229
Receiving Faxes Manually
Related topics
Send Settings - Fax
Set the send options you want to use for outgoing faxes.

Batch Send Off Sorts outgoing faxes by recipient in the product's
memory, and then sends them as a batch. Up to five
On
documents (200 pages total) can be sent at one time.
Save Failure Data Off Saves faxes that failed to be sent in the product’s
memory. You can resend the faxes from the product's
On
Job/Status menu.
When you select On, you can select a time period to
store the saved faxes.
Wait Time for Next Off Sets a time in between sending the next fax
Original
On
Fax Preview Display Off Sets a time for previewing the scanned document on
Time the LCD screen before it is sent
On
Allow Backup Allowed Allows you to back up sent faxes. Select Fax > Fax
Settings > Backup to view backed up faxes.
Not Allowed

Set the save/forward or print options you want to use for incoming faxes.
Save/Forward Settings
230
Unconditional Save to Inbox Saves received faxes in printer's inbox
Save/Forward
Save to Computer Converts received faxes to PDFs and saves them on
a computer connected to the printer
Save to Memory Converts received faxes to PDFs and saves them on
Device an external memory device connected to the printer
Forward Forwards received faxes to another fax machine, or
converts them to PDFs and forwards them to a shared
folder on a network or an email address. Forwarded
faxes are deleted from the printer.
Email Notifications Sends an email notification after a fax is received,
printed, saved, or forwarded
Conditional — Sets up conditions to save, forward, or print received
Save/Forward faxes. Select Enable to enable a condition. Select the
arrow icon to enter conditions and other settings.
Common Settings Inbox Settings Sets up what happens when the fax memory is full, or
sets up a password for the inbox. You cannot set a
password if the Options when memory is full setting
has been set to Receive and print faxes.
Email Subject to Specifies a subject when forwarding a fax to an email
Forward address
Box Document Select On to automatically delete received faxes after
Delete Settings a set period of time
Print Settings

Auto Reduction On Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit
on the paper size in the selected paper source.
Off Select to print large incoming faxes at their original
size on multiple sheets, if necessary.
231
Split Page Settings Delete Print Data Select how to split large incoming faxes across
After Split multiple sheets when using the Auto Reduction
option.
Overlap When
Split
Acting Print On (Split to Pages) Select to split large incoming faxes across multiple
sheets.
On (Reduce to Fit) Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit
on the paper size in the selected paper source.
Off Select to print large incoming faxes at their original
size on multiple sheets, if necessary.
Auto Rotation On If you have loaded A5-size paper, select On to rotate
landscape-oriented incoming faxes so that they print
Off
correctly on the paper.
Add Reception On Select On to include the date, time, the sender's
Information information, and a page number in the header of your
Off
incoming faxes.
2-Sided On Select On to print incoming faxes double sided. You
can also select the Binding Margin.
Off
Print Start Timing All Pages Select to print incoming faxes after the product
Received receives all of the pages of the document.
First Page Select to print incoming faxes as soon as the product
Received receives the first page of the document.
Collation Stack On Select On to print incoming faxes so that the pages
are stacked in the correct page order. (When the
Off
product is low on memory, this option may not be
available.)
Print Suspend Time Off Select On to set a time period to stop automatic
printing of faxes or reports and save received faxes in
On
the product’s memory. (Make sure there is enough
Time to Stop free memory before using this function.)
Time to Restart
232
Quiet Mode On Select On to reduce noise during printing (printing
speed may be reduced).
Off

Related references
Received Fax is Not Printed
Report Settings - Fax
Set the options you want for fax reports.

Forwarding Report Print on Error Prints a report after forwarding a received document
only if an error occurs
Print Prints a report after forwarding a received document
Do Not Print Does not print a report after forwarding a received
document
Backup Error Report On Select On to print a report when a backup error for
sending faxes occurs
Off
Fax Log Auto Print Off Does not print a fax log
On(Every 100) Prints a fax log after every 100 fax jobs are
completed
On(Time) Prints a fax log at a specified time. If the number of
completed fax jobs exceeds 30, the fax log prints
before the specified time.
Reception Report Print on Error Prints a report after receiving a fax only if an error
occurs
Print Prints a report after receiving a fax
Do Not Print Does not print a report after receiving a fax
233
Attach Fax Image to Off Does not include an image on the Transmission
Report Report
On(Large Image) Prints a Transmission Report that includes the upper
part of the first page of the sent document
On(Small Image) Prints a Transmission Report that includes a reduced
size of the entire first page of the sent document
Fax Log Layout Combine Send and Prints a Transmission Report and a Reception
Receive Report on the same sheet when you print a fax log
Separate Send and Prints a Transmission Report and a Reception
Receive Report on separate sheets when you print a fax log
Report Format Simple Prints a simple fax report
Detail Prints a fax report that includes error codes
Fax Log Output Method Print Prints fax reports
Save to Memory Saves fax reports to an inserted memory device.
Device Select Create a folder to save fax data to create a
folder on the inserted memory device.
Forward Forwards fax reports to a specified destination

Security Settings - Fax
Set the security options you want to use for fax data.

Direct Dialing Off Does not restrict dialed fax numbers.
Restrictions
On Allows faxing only to numbers stored in the contacts
list or history.
Enter Twice Requires you to enter fax numbers twice to prevent
errors.
Broadcasting Off Select On to allow only one fax number to be entered
Restrictions as the recipient
On
234
Confirm Address List Off Selects whether or not to display a recipient
confirmation screen before a fax is sent.
On
Backup Data Auto Clear Off Automatically erases sent or received fax data from
your product's memory.
On
Clear Backup Data — Deletes all sent or received fax data remaining in your
product's memory; run this function if you are giving
away or disposing of your product.
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows

You can set up the FAX Utility for Windows for use with your product.
Note: Before using the FAX Utility for Windows, make sure you have set up the fax features on your
product using the product control panel. Also first confirm that you can send and receive faxes using the
control panel.
• Windows 11: Click , then search for EPSON Software and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select EPSON Software.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start > Programs or All Programs > EPSON Software.
2. Select FAX Utility.
235
The first time you use the FAX Utility, you see this introduction window:
3. Read about the FAX Utility and click Return to the main window at the bottom of the window.
236
4. Click Select Printer and follow the on-screen instructions to transfer your product's fax settings to
the FAX Utility.
Note: For detailed information, click Help or Open Online Help.
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac

You can set up your fax header and select your fax settings using the FAX Utility for Mac.
237
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or
Printers & Scanners, select the FAX option for your product, and select Options & Supplies.
Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
2. Double-click FAX Utility, if necessary.
3. Select your FAX product in the Printer list.

4. Select Fax Settings.
5. Follow the prompts that appear on the screen to enter your fax header information and select your
fax settings.
Note: For detailed information, select the FAX Utility ? icon.

You can set up a list of contacts and their fax numbers so you can quickly select them for faxing. You
can also set up contact groups to send a fax message to multiple contacts.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
238
Creating a Contact
Editing or Deleting a Contact
Creating a Contact Group
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group
Related references
Related tasks
Creating a Contact
You can create a list of contacts to save frequently used fax numbers.
Note: You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined.

2. Select Fax.
3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon.

5. Select Add Contact.
6. Select the registry number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
7. Select the Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters),
and select OK.
8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters), and select OK.
Note: This field is automatically populated after you enter the name. This field is optional.
239
9. Select the Fax Number field, and use the numeric keypad on the LCD screen or the buttons on the
product to enter the fax number. You can enter up to 64 characters. Select OK when you are done.
Note: If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax number.
If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign instead of the
code.
10. Set the Fax Speed, Subaddress, and Password settings, if necessary.
11. Select OK.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Editing or Deleting a Contact

You can edit or delete any of the contacts on your list.
2. Select Fax.
4. Select the icon next to the contact you want to edit or delete.
• To delete the contact, select Delete and select Yes on the confirmation screen.
• To edit the contact, select Edit, select the item you want to change, enter the correct information,
and select OK. When you are finished editing, select OK.
Creating a Contact Group

You can create a group of contacts so that you can easily send faxes to multiple recipients.
Note: You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined.

2. Select Fax.
240
4. Select the icon.
5. Select Add Group.
6. Select the registry number you want to use for the group you are adding.
7. Select the Group Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the group name (up to 30
characters), and select OK.
8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for a
group (up to 30 characters), and select OK.
Note: This field is automatically populated after you enter the group name. This field is optional.
9. Select Contact(s) Added to the Group.

You see your contacts list.
10. Select each contact you want to include in your group.
Each selected contact is highlighted.
11. Select Close.
12. Select OK.
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group

You can edit an existing contact group to add or delete entries. You can also delete the entire contact
group.
2. Select Fax.
4. Select the icon next to the group you want to edit or delete.
5. To edit the group, select Edit.
6. Select Contact(s) Added to the Group.
You see a list of the contacts in your group.
7. Select the contact you want to add or delete.
241
Each selected contact is highlighted.
8. Select Close.
9. Select OK.
Sending Faxes
See these sections to send faxes using your product.
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel

See these sections to send faxes using the product's control panel.
Fax Sending Options
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
You can send a fax from your product control panel by entering the fax number, or selecting the number
from either the contact list or fax history.
Note: You can send a black-and-white fax to up to 200 recipients at a time, or send a color fax to one
recipient at a time. If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in
black-and-white.
Note: The product can queue up to 50 black-and-white fax jobs. You can check or cancel fax jobs in the
queue using the Job/Status menu.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
242
3. Select Fax.
Note: To fax a double-sided document, place your document in the ADF and turn on the ADF 2-
Sided setting. (You cannot fax double-sided documents in color.)
4. Do one of the following to select fax recipients:

• Select Keypad and enter a fax number. Select OK when done. To add another fax number,
repeat the same steps. You can also use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter a fax
number.
Note: If direct dialing has been restricted, you can only select the number from the contact list or
fax history. If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax
number. If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign
instead of the code. If your fax number requires a brief pause, select the icon to insert a
pause symbol (–).
• Select Contacts to display the contact list. Select one or more contacts (select the contact again
to deselect it). You can also select the Search for Contacts field to search for recipients by name,
index name, or entry number. Select Close when you are finished.
• Select Recent to display the sent fax history.
Note: To delete entered recipients, select the Select Recipient field, select the recipient you want to
delete, and select Remove.
5. If you need to change any fax settings, select Fax Settings and select your settings.
6. If you want to preview your fax in black-and-white on the LCD, press the Preview icon. (If the
preview looks incorrect, select Cancel, reposition the document or change the fax settings, and
repeat this step.)
Note: If you do not touch the preview screen for 20 seconds, your product sends the fax
automatically. You cannot preview images when the Direct Send setting is turned on.
7. If you want to save your fax settings for later use, select Presets and add a new entry.
243
8. Select the Send icon.
Note: To cancel faxing, select the cancel button. You can also cancel the job or check the job
status from the Job/Status menu.
Your product scans your original and prompts you to place additional pages, if necessary.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax.
Note: Your product does not save sent color faxes to its memory. If the Save Failure Data option is
enabled, faxes that failed to be sent are stored to the product's memory and you can resend them from
the Job/Status menu.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel

Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Using Presets
Related topics
Fax Sending Options
While sending a fax, you can select Fax Settings and select these options.

Resolution Standard Adjusts the scan resolution and print quality of
outgoing faxes
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Density Varying levels Lets you select from various density levels
available
244
Original Type Text Specifies the document type of your originals and
adjusts the quality of your copies
Text & Image
Photo
Remove Background Auto Automatically removes any background color on
scanned images
Varying levels Lets you select from various levels of background
available color adjustment
Sharpness Varying levels Lets you adjust the sharpness level of outgoing faxes
available
ADF 2-Sided Off Select On to enable 2-sided faxing from the ADF. The
Direct Send option and color faxing are disabled when
On
you turn on this setting.
Continuous Scan (ADF) Off Select On to have the product to ask if you want to
scan another page after a document in the ADF has
On
finished scanning
Original Size (Glass) Various sizes Select the size for a document placed on the scanner
glass, or select Auto Detect to have the product
Auto Detect
automatically detect the size of the document.
Color Mode B&W Select whether to scan images in color or black and
white
Color
Direct Send Off Select On to send black-and-white faxes to a single
recipient as soon as the connection is made, without
On
saving the scanned image to memory. You cannot
use this setting when sending a color fax or sending a
fax to multiple recipients.
Priority Send Off Select On to send the current fax before other faxes
waiting to be sent
On
Send Fax Later Off Select On to send the current monochrome fax at a
selected time
On
245
Add Sender Information Off Lets you include a header, your phone number, or a
destination list in the selected location on your
Outside of Image
outgoing faxes
Inside of Image
Notify Send Result Off Sends a notification to the selected email address
when an outgoing fax is sent
On
Transmission Report Print on Error Lets you select when to print transmission reports
Print
Do Not Print
Backup Off Saves a copy of the scanned fax to the selected email
address or network folder/FTP location
On

Related references
Fax Memory Full Error Appears
Fax Quality is Poor
Related tasks
You can send a fax at a time of your choice.
Note: Make sure the product's date and time settings are correct. You can only send faxes in black-and-
white when you use this option.

3. Select Fax.
246
4. Enter a fax number or select a number from the Contacts or Recent lists.
5. Select Fax Settings.
6. Select Send Fax Later.
7. Select On.
8. Select Time, use the displayed keypad on the LCD screen to enter your desired time, and select
OK.
Note: To cancel faxing, select the cancel button.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax at the specified time.
Note: If the product is turned off at the specified time, the fax is sent when it is powered on.

Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Related topics
You can store one scanned document (up to 100 black-and-white pages) and have it sent automatically
when another fax machine requests it. Other fax users can receive the document by calling your fax
number and using the polling receive function on their fax machines.
3. Select Fax Box.
4. Select Polling Send/Board.
247
5. Select Polling Send.
6. Review the displayed Polling Send Box settings. If you need to make changes, select the icon
and select Settings. Make any necessary changes and select OK.
7. Select Add Document.
8. Review the displayed Fax Settings. Make any necessary changes.
9. Select the Store icon.

Your document is scanned and stored until you overwrite or delete it.
You can store only one document at a time. Subsequent documents overwrite the existing document.
You can also delete a stored document from the Job/Status menu.
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related topics
You can store up to 10 black-and-white scanned documents (200 pages total) and send them whenever
necessary.
3. Select Fax.
4. Select the icon.

5. Select Extended Fax.
6. Select Store Fax Data and select On.
7. Select Close.
8. Select any other fax settings as necessary and select Close.
9. Select the Store icon.

Your document is scanned, stored, and briefly previewed.
248
10. When you are ready to send the document, press the home button, if necessary, and select Fax
Box.
11. Select Stored Documents.
12. Select the stored fax job you want to send.

The selected fax is sent.
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related topics
If you have connected a telephone to the EXT port on your product, you can send a fax by dialing the fax
number from the connected telephone. If the recipient's phone number and fax number are the same,
you can speak to the recipient before sending the fax.
3. Dial the fax number from the connected telephone. Speak to the recipient if necessary.
Note: If you are using a pre-paid calling card, enter the number and password required to use the
card before entering the destination fax number.
4. Select Fax on the LCD screen.

5. Select Fax Settings and select any settings as necessary.
Note: Your product now communicates with the recipient's fax machine. Do not hang up the
telephone.
6. When you hear a fax tone, select the Send icon to start sending the fax.
Note: If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in black-
and-white.
249
7. Hang up the telephone.
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related topics

You can send a fax from a printing program in Windows. You can fax up to 100 pages at a time,
including a cover sheet.
1. Open the file you want to fax and select the print command.
2. Select your product with the FAX option as the printer.
250
3. To change the Paper Size, Orientation, Color, Image Quality, or Character Density settings, click the
Preferences or Properties button.
Note: If you see a Setup, Printer, or Options button, click it. Then click Preferences or Properties
on the next screen. For more information about selecting fax print settings, click Help.
4. Select the Page Range as necessary. (Leave the Number of copies set to 1.)
5. Click Print or OK.
If you’re faxing for the first time, you see a window like this one:
6. Enter your sender information so that recipients can identify the origin of the fax. Then click OK to
save the sender information.
251
7. Enter the recipient's name and fax number or select a recipient from the phone book, then click
Next.
Note: For detailed instructions on using the Epson FAX Utility, click Help.
8. Select a cover sheet and enter a subject and message, then click Next.
9. Click Send to transmit your fax.
Related references
252
You can send a fax from a Mac printing program using the FAX Utility. You can fax up to 100 pages at a
time, including a cover sheet.
1. Open the file you want to fax.
you are using.
3. Select your product FAX option as the Printer setting.

print window.
5. Select the number of pages you are faxing as the Pages setting.
Note: Leave the Copies setting set to 1.
6. Select Recipient Settings from the pop-up menu.
253
7. Do one of the following to choose your recipient:

• Select a name or group from the Recipient List.
• Enter a name, company, and fax number and click the + button.
• Click the icon and select a recipient from your address book.
8. Select Fax Settings from the pop-up menu.
254
9. Select the Color and Image Quality settings you want to use for your fax.
10. Click Fax.
Related references
Receiving Faxes
See these sections to receive faxes with your product.
Fax Reception
Forwarding Received Faxes
Receiving a Fax by Polling
Fax Reception
Your product will automatically receive and print faxes when you set the Receive Mode to Auto.
255
If you connected a telephone to your product so you can use the same phone line for faxes and voice
calls, you can also set your product to receive faxes manually. This allows you to check for a fax tone
using the telephone and press a button on your product to receive the fax.
Make sure to load paper in your product and select your fax settings before receiving a fax.
Note: If you run out of paper during fax printing, load more paper and press the button indicated on your
product's LCD screen to continue.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes

To receive faxes automatically, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto (the default setting for the
product).
To change the Receive Mode if necessary, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic
Settings > Receive Mode.
If an answering machine is connected, make sure the product's Rings to Answer setting is set higher
than the number of rings your answering machine is set to answer a call. For example, if the answering
machine is set to pick up on the fourth ring, set the product to pick up on the fifth ring or later.
Related references
Related tasks

You can set up your product to receive faxes manually by setting the Receive Mode to Manual. This lets
you check for a fax tone on the connected telephone before receiving a fax.
1. To change the Receive Mode, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic
Settings > Receive Mode and select Manual.
2. When the connected telephone rings, answer the call.
3. If you hear a fax tone, select Fax on the LCD display.
256
4. Select Send/Receive.
5. Select Receive.
6. Select the Receive icon to start receiving the fax.

7. Hang up the telephone.
Related references
Related tasks

You can forward received faxes to another fax machine, or convert the faxes into PDF documents and
forward them to a shared folder on the network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted
from the product's memory. Before using this feature, make sure the date and time are set correctly, the
forwarding destination is set up in the contact list, and the email server settings are configured.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
> Unconditional Save/Foward > Forward > Yes.
Note: If you want to print the fax automatically before forwarding it, select Yes and Print.
3. Select Add Entry and select the forwarding destinations from the contacts list.
4. When you are finished selecting your forwarding destinations, select Close.
5. Confirm the displayed forwarding destinations and select Close.
6. Select an Options When Forwarding Failed option to choose whether you want to print the faxes
or save them in the printer's inbox if forwarding received faxes fails.
Related references
257
Receiving a Fax by Polling
You can use polling to receive a fax from another fax machine (such as a fax information service).
Note: You cannot use polling to receive a fax from a fax information service that uses audio guidance.

2. Select Fax.
3. Select the icon.

4. Select Extended Fax.
5. Set Polling Receive to On.
6. Select Close.
7. Select Close.
8. Enter the fax number you expect to receive the fax from.
9. Select the Polling icon to start receiving the fax.

Checking Fax Status

You can check the status of current fax jobs, or faxes that have been received or sent on the product
control panel.
1. Press the Job/Status button. Select the Job/Status tab if necessary.
• To check the status of current fax jobs, select the fax job you want to check.
• To check the history of faxes that have been sent, received, or saved, select Log and select the
job you want to check.
Note: If you see a numbered icon above the icon on your product's LCD screen or the
Received Fax light is flashing, received faxes have been temporarily saved to the product's
memory.
258
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box)
You can save received faxes in your product's memory and view them on the LCD screen.
Note: The Inbox can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access the Inbox, contact your

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
> Unconditional Save/Forward.
3. Set Save to Inbox to On.
4. Press the home button.
5. Select Fax Box.
• Select Inbox/Confidential to view received documents.
• Select Stored Documents to view saved documents that have not been sent when Store Fax
Data is set to On.
• Select Polling Send/Board to view documents that are stored for fax polling.
7. Select the fax you want to view.
You see the fax displayed on the screen.
8. Select the icon.

9. Select one of the printing or deleting options, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: Delete faxes after you print or view them to prevent the product's memory from filling up. When the
memory is full, you can only forward or print incoming faxes.

You can print several types of fax reports whenever necessary. You can also print the fax log printed
automatically by turning on Fax Log Auto Print.
259
2. Select Fax.
3. Select the icon.

4. Select Fax Report.
5. Select the fax report you want to print.
Fax Report Options
Related references
Fax Report Options

Select the fax report or list you want to print.
Last Transmission
Print a report on the previous fax that was sent or received through polling.
Fax Log
View or print a report on recent fax transmissions.
Stored Fax Documents
Print a list of the fax jobs currently stored in the product's memory.
Fax Settings List
Print a list of the current fax communication settings.
Conditional Save/Forward List
Print a list of the current conditional save/forward settings.
Protocol Trace
Print a detailed report for the previous sent or received fax.
Parent topic: Printing Fax Reports
260
Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Follow the instructions here to work with an external USB device connected to your product.
Disconnecting a USB Device
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Transferring Files on a USB Device
Related tasks
Disabling the External Interface

Connect a USB device or its USB cable to the USB port on the front of the product.
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the compatibility of your device. Make sure the files on the device are
compatible with the product.
Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product

Related references
External USB Device Specifications
Related tasks
261
Transferring Files from a USB Device to Your Computer

After you finish working with a USB device, follow these steps to remove it.
1. If your product is connected to your computer using a USB cable, do one of the following:
• Windows: Open the My Computer, Computer, This PC, or Windows Explorer utility. Then
right-click the name of your USB device (listed as a removable disk) and select Eject.
• Mac: Drag the removable disk icon for your USB device from the desktop into the trash.
Caution: Do not remove a USB device before completing the procedure above or you may lose data
from the flash drive.
2. Pull the USB device or cable out of the USB port on the front of the product.
Related tasks
Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers from Your Computer
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen

See these sections to view and print photos or other files displayed on your product's LCD screen.
Printing JPEG Photos
Printing TIFF and PDF Files
Printing JPEG Photos

You can select JPEG photos for printing as you view them on the LCD screen.
3. Select JPEG.
Note: If you have more than 999 JPEG images on your device, the images are divided into groups,
and you must first select the group you want to display.
262
4. Do one of the following to select your photos:
• In Tile View, select the thumbnail images of the photos you want to print.
• In Single View, select the thumbnail image of the photo you want to print, then press the left or
right arrow buttons to scroll through and select additional photos, or select Tile View to return to
the thumbnail image view and select additional photos.
• To select all photos, select the menu icon and select Select All Images.
5. Select Proceed to Print.
6. To change the print settings, select Basic Settings and select the necessary settings.
7. To adjust the photos (adjustments modify only your printed copies, not the original files), select
Advanced and make the necessary adjustments.
8. Use the numeric keypad on the control panel or select Copies on the LCD screen and use the
numeric keypad on the screen to select the number of copies (up to 99).
9. When you are ready to print, select the Print icon.
Note: To cancel printing, select the cancel button or select Cancel on the LCD screen, then
select Cancel again to confirm.
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode

Parent topic: Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a JPEG from a USB device.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.
Basic Settings
Print settings Available options Description

Paper Setting Various paper size Select the paper source that you want to use.
and type settings
B&W — Prints a color photo in black and white.
Color — Prints a color photo in its original colors.
263
Advanced settings

Layout 1-up Print one photo per page.
20-up Print 20 photos per page.
Index Print numbered photo thumbnails with date information.
Fit Frame On Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo
layout.
Off Turns off automatic cropping.
Quality Standard Provides good quality for most prints.
Best Provides the highest quality for special prints.
Date Various date formats Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the
format you select.
Fix Photo Various settings Automatically adjusts the brightness, contrast, and
saturation of the photo based on the setting that is
selected.
Enhance Off Turns off automatic adjustments.
Fix Red-Eye Off Automatically fixes the red-eye effect in photos; see Note
below.
On
Note: Fix Red-Eye makes corrections to printouts, not the original photo files. Depending on the type of
photo, parts of the image other than the eyes may be corrected.
Parent topic: Printing JPEG Photos
Printing TIFF and PDF Files

You can select and print TIFF or PDF files from a USB flash drive.
3. Select TIFF or PDF.
You see a list of the available files.
264
4. Select the file you want to print.
You see information about the file.
5. Do the following as necessary:
• To print more than one copy, use the numeric keypad on the control panel or select Copies on the
LCD screen and use the numeric keypad on the screen to select the number of copies (up to 99).
• To change the print settings, select Basic Settings or Advanced and select the necessary
settings.
6. When you are ready to print, select the Print icon.
Note: To cancel printing, select the cancel button or select Cancel on the LCD screen, then
select Cancel again to confirm.
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode

Print Setting Options - PDF Mode
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a TIFF from a USB device.
Basic Settings

and type settings
Advanced settings
265
Layout 1-up Print one photo per page.
20-up Print 20 photos per page.
Index Print numbered photo thumbnails with date information.
Fit Frame On Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo
layout.
Off Turns off automatic cropping.
Quality Standard Provides good quality for most prints.
Best Provides the highest quality for special prints.
Print Order Last Page on Top Select the printing order for multi-page documents.
First Page on Top
Date Various date formats Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the
format you select.
Parent topic: Printing TIFF and PDF Files

Print Setting Options - PDF Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a PDF from a USB device.
Basic Settings

and type settings
Advanced settings
266
2-Sided Off Two-sided printing is off.
On Two-sided printing is on.
Binding (Copy) Select the binding position for the document.
Print Order Last Page on Top Select the printing order for multi-page documents.
First Page on Top
Parent topic: Printing TIFF and PDF Files
Transferring Files on a USB Device

You can transfer files to and from a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product.

Before you transfer files from a computer to a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your
product, you may need to set up your product's file sharing settings.
Caution: Remove the USB device before you change this setting or you may lose data from the device.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device Interface.
267
3. Select Memory Device and make sure it is set to Enable.

4. Select File Sharing.
5. Select the way your computer is connected to the product: either USB or Network.
Parent topic: Transferring Files on a USB Device
Related tasks

You can transfer files to and from a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product
and a computer connected to your product.
Note: Do not transfer files to and from a USB device while you are printing from the device.
1. Make sure your product is connected to a computer.

2. Insert a USB device or its USB cable into the USB port on the front of your product.
3. Do one of the following to access your USB device files from your computer:
• Windows: Open the My Computer, Computer, This PC, or Windows Explorer utility, then
select the removable disk icon.
268
• Mac with a USB connection: Look for the removable disk icon on your desktop, then select it.
• Mac with a network connection: Select the hard drive icon on your desktop or select Computer
from the Go menu, select your product in the SHARED section of the sidebar (you may need to
widen the sidebar to see the name), and select the USBSTORAGE icon.
4. Select the folder that contains your files.
5. Drag the files you want to transfer to the desired folder on your computer or on your USB device.
Note: Your product's LCD screen does not update to display new information about your USB device
after you copy files to it or delete files from it. Remove and insert the USB device to update the
information.
Parent topic: Transferring Files on a USB Device

Related tasks
269
Replacing Ink Supply Units (Ink Packs), Maintenance Boxes,
and Cassette Rollers
When ink packs are expended, or the maintenance box and cassette rollers are at the end of their
service life, you need to replace them. The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system
during print head cleaning.
Note: Please dispose of your used Epson branded ink packs and maintenance boxes responsibly and in
accordance with local requirements. If you would like to return your used ink packs and maintenance
boxes to Epson for proper disposal, please go to epson.com/recycle for more information.
Ink Pack Safety Instructions

Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status
Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes
Removing and Installing Ink Packs
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers
Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Ink Packs
Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows

• Keep ink packs out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
• Be careful when you handle used ink packs; there may be ink remaining around the ink supply port. If
ink gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If it gets in your eyes, flush them immediately
with water. If discomfort or vision problems continue after a thorough flushing, see a doctor
immediately. If ink gets in your mouth, see a doctor right away.
• Install a new ink pack immediately after removing an expended one. Leaving ink packs uninstalled can
dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing.
• Install all ink packs; otherwise you cannot print.
• If you need to remove an ink pack temporarily, make sure you protect the ink pack from dirt and dust.
Store the ink pack in the same environment as the printer. Because the ink supply port is equipped
with a valve designed to contain the release of excess ink, there is no need to supply your own covers
or plugs.
270
• Do not remove or tear the label on the ink pack; this can cause leakage.
• Do not remove the transparent seal from the ink supply area. This may cause the ink pack to become
unusable.
• Do not touch the green IC chip on the side of the handle. This may prevent normal operation.
• Do not shake ink packs too vigorously; otherwise ink may leak.
• Do not drop or knock the ink pack against hard objects; otherwise ink may leak.
• Use an ink pack before the date printed on its package.
• Do not disassemble an ink pack or a maintenance box. Ink may get in your eyes or on your skin.
• Store ink packs in a cool, dark place.
• Do not store ink packs in high or freezing temperatures.
• After bringing an ink pack inside from a cold storage site, allow it to warm up at room temperature for
at least 12 hours before using it.
• Store ink packs with the bottom facing down.
• To help protect your print head, a variable ink safety reserve remains in the ink supply unit when your
printer notifies you to replace the ink pack. The yields quoted for you do not include this reserve.
• You cannot use the ink packs supplied with the product as replacement ink packs. They must be used
for initial setup.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Supply Units (Ink Packs), Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Related tasks

Your product and its software will let you know when ink is low or expended, or when the maintenance
box needs to be replaced.
Note: When using the PCL or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product, you can check ink and
maintenance box status by using the product buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson
printer software. To download the standard Epson printer software, visit epson.com/support (U.S.),
epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen

Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Windows
271
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Mac
Related tasks

When one of your ink packs is low or expended, you see a message on the LCD screen. Follow the
steps on the LCD screen to replace the ink pack.
You can also check the status of the ink packs and maintenance box from the product control panel.
2. Select the icon.

The ink and maintenance box levels are displayed.
Note: The displayed ink and maintenance box levels are approximate.
Parent topic: Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status

Related tasks

A low ink reminder appears if you try to print when ink is low. You can also check your ink or
maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Windows computer.
1. To check your status, access the Windows Desktop and double-click the icon for your product in
the right side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . Then click Details.
272
2. Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or ink pack as indicated on the screen.
Note: If any of the ink packs installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model,
or improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate ink status.

Related tasks
273
You can check the status of your ink and maintenance box using a utility on your Mac.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or
Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies. Select Utility and select
Open Printer Utility.
2. Select EPSON Status Monitor.
3. Do the following as necessary:

• You can update the ink and maintenance box status by clicking Update.
274
• Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or an ink pack as indicated on the screen.
Note: If an ink pack installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model, or
improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate ink status.

Related tasks

You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales),
epson.ca (Canadian sales), or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies
from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the
U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
The included initial ink packs are designed for reliable printer setup and cannot be used as replacement
ink packs or resold. After setup, the remaining ink is available for printing. Yields are based on ISO
24711 in default mode, printing continuously. Yields vary due to print images, settings, and
temperatures. Printing infrequently or primarily with one color reduces yields. All ink packs must be
installed with ink for printing and printer maintenance. For print quality, some ink remains in replaced ink
packs.
Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack) and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Related tasks
275
Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack) and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Use these part numbers when you order or purchase new ink packs or a new maintenance box.
U.S. and Canada
Ink color Part number

Standard-capacity High-capacity Extra-high
capacity
Black T10S100 T10W100 T10Y100
Cyan T10S200 T10W200 —
Magenta T10S300 T10W300 —
Yellow T10S400 T10W400 —
Maintenance box part number: C9382

Latin America
Ink color Part number

High-capacity Extra High-capacity
Black T11A120-AL T11B120-AL
Cyan T11A220-AL —
Magenta T11A320-AL —
Yellow T11A420-AL —
Maintenance box part number: C9382

Parent topic: Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes

If an ink pack is low or expended, a message appears on your product and on your computer screen.
Note which ink packs need to be replaced. Make sure you have your replacement ink packs handy
before you begin. You must install new ink packs immediately after removing the old ones.
Caution: Make sure you follow all safety precautions when handling ink packs. See the link below for
more information.
276
1. Select How To .
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the expended ink packs.
Related concepts
Related references
Grainy Printout
Related tasks
Printing with Expended Color Ink Packs - Windows
Printing with Expended Color Ink Packs - Mac

If the maintenance box is full, a message appears on your product's LCD screen. Follow the steps on the
LCD screen to replace the maintenance box. Make sure you have a new maintenance box before you
begin.
Note: When the maintenance box is full, you cannot print or clean the print head until it is replaced.
However, you can perform non-printing functions such as scanning.
Note: If necessary, select the icon on the LCD, then select How To > Replace Maintenance Box and
press the OK button to view the instructions.
Note: In some print cycles a small amount of surplus ink may be collected in the maintenance box. To
prevent ink leakage from the maintenance box, the product is designed to stop printing when the
absorbing capacity of the maintenance box has reached its limit. Whether and how often this is required
277
will vary according to the number of pages you print, the type of material you print on and the number of
cleaning cycles that the printer performs.
Note the following precautions when replacing the maintenance box:

• Do not remove the maintenance box or its cover except when replacing the maintenance box;
otherwise, ink may leak.
• Do not touch the green chip on the side of the maintenance box.
• Do not tilt the maintenance box after removing it or ink may leak.
• Do not touch the openings in the maintenance box or you may get ink on you.
• Do not drop the maintenance box or subject it to strong shocks.
• If you cannot replace the cover, the maintenance box may not be installed correctly. Remove and
reinstall the maintenance box.
• Do not store the maintenance box in high or freezing temperatures.
• Do not replace the maintenance box during printing; otherwise, ink may leak.
• Keep the maintenance box out of direct sunlight.
Related concepts
Related tasks

When the paper feed rollers in the paper cassettes need to be replaced, you see a message on the LCD
screen. (These are also referred to as "pickup rollers".)
There are different paper feed rollers for the internal paper cassette (Paper Cassette 1) and the optional
paper cassettes available for the printer. Make sure you install the correct paper feed rollers for the
paper cassette.
• For Paper Cassette 1, use the "Paper Feed Roller for Cassette A" (C12C938261)
• For Paper Cassettes 2 through 4, use the "Paper Feed Roller for Cassette B" (C12C938281)
278
Refer to the instructions in the paper feed roller packaging when replacing the paper feed rollers. Reset
the maintenance roller counter for the paper cassette to keep track of roller usage.
Related references
Related tasks

You must reset the roller counter after replacing the cassette rollers to clear the roller replacement
message and to keep track of roller usage correctly.
2. Select Maintenance > Pickup roller information.
3. Select Reset Counter.
4. Select the paper cassette in which you replaced the rollers, if necessary.
5. Select Yes.
6. Select Yes again to confirm the reset.
7. If you want to feed a sheet of paper to check the roller installation, select Yes. (Otherwise, select
No.)
8. If you selected Yes, you can select Run to perform a Paper Guide Cleaning cycle, or select Finish
to exit.
Related tasks
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Ink Packs

When a color ink pack is expended, you can temporarily continue printing from your computer using
black ink. Replace the expended color ink pack as soon as possible for future printing.
Note: You cannot print with expended color ink using your product's control panel.
279

If you see a message during printing telling you that you can temporarily print in black ink with an
expended color ink supply unit, you can cancel your print job and select settings to print on plain paper or
on an envelope.
Note: To use this feature, Epson Status Monitor must be enabled.
1. Click Cancel or Cancel Print to cancel your print job.
Note: If the message screen appears on another computer on a network, you may need to cancel
the print job using the product control panel.
2. Load plain paper or an envelope in your product.

3. Access the print settings in your print application.
4. Click the Main tab.
5. Select Plain Paper/Bright White Paper or Envelope as the paper type setting.
6. Select the Black/Grayscale or Grayscale checkbox.
7. Click OK.
8. Print your document.
Epson Status Monitor 3 displays a print message.
9. Click Print in Black to print your document.
Parent topic: Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Ink Packs
Related tasks

If printing stops, you can cancel your print job and select settings to temporarily print with only black ink
on plain paper or on an envelope.
1. Click the printer icon in the Dock.
280
2. If you see a message telling you that you can temporarily print with only black ink, click the Delete or
icon to cancel your print job. (If an error message is displayed, click OK.)
Note: If the message screen appears on another computer on a network, you may need to cancel
the print job using the product control panel.

& Supplies.
6. Select On as the Permit temporary black printing setting.

7. Click OK.
8. Close the utility window.
9. Load plain paper or an envelope in your product.
10. Access the print settings in your print application.
11. Select Print Settings from the pop-up menu.
281
12. Select Plain Paper/Bright White Paper or Envelope as the paper type setting.
13. Select the Grayscale option.
14. Click Print to print your document.
Parent topic: Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Ink Packs
Related tasks

The following window appears when black ink runs low and there is more color ink.
Note: The window appears only when you have selected Plain Paper/Bright White Paper as the paper
type setting, and depends on other selected print settings. To use this feature, Epson Status Monitor
must be enabled.
• Click Yes to use a mixture of color inks to create black, or No to continue using the remaining black ink
for the document you are printing.
• Click Disable this feature to continue using the remaining black ink.
Note: If you disable this feature, it remains disabled until you install a new black ink cartridge.
282
Related tasks
283
Adjusting Print Quality
If your print quality declines, you may need to run a utility to clean or align the print head.
Print Head Maintenance
Print Head Alignment
Cleaning the Translucent Film
Checking the Number of Sheets on the LCD Screen
Print Head Maintenance

If your printouts become too light, or you see dark or light bands across them, you may need to clean the
print head nozzles. Cleaning uses ink, so clean the nozzles only if print quality declines.
You can check for clogged nozzles before you clean them so you don’t clean them unnecessarily.
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality

You can print a nozzle check pattern to check for clogged nozzles.
Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance
Related references
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies
Blank Pages Print
Grainy Printout
You can check the print head nozzles using the control panel on your product.
284
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
4. Select Maintenance >Print Head Nozzle Check .
5. Select Print and press the OK button.
The nozzle pattern prints.
6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning

• If there are no gaps, select O.
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select X.
8. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head, check the nozzles, and repeat the
process as necessary.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 3 times, wait at least 12 hours
without printing. Then try cleaning the print head again. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson
support.
Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check
285
Related tasks
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
You can check the print head nozzles using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen and the output tray is extended.
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right
side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
• Mac: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
4. Select Nozzle Check or Print Head Nozzle Check.
286
5. Click Print.
287
Print head is clean

• If there are no gaps, click Finish.
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, clean the print head.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 3 times, turn the product off and wait
at least 12 hours. Then check the print head nozzles and try cleaning the print head again, if necessary.
If quality still does not improve, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check
Related tasks
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Print Head Cleaning

If print quality has declined and the nozzle check pattern indicates clogged nozzles, you can clean the
print head.
Note: You cannot clean the print head if ink is expended, and may not be able to clean it when ink is low.
You must replace the ink pack first.
288
Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance
Related references
Blank Pages Print
Related tasks
Enabling Periodic Cleaning
You can clean the print head using the control panel on your product.
4. Select Maintenance > Print Head Cleaning.
5. Select Start to clean the print head.
When the cleaning cycle is finished, a nozzle check pattern is printed.
be able to print.
Print head is clean
289
• If there are no gaps, select O .
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select X .
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 3 times, wait at least 12 hours
without printing. Then try cleaning the print head again. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related tasks
You can clean the print head using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer.
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right
side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
• Mac: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
4. Select Head Cleaning or Print Head Cleaning.
290
5. Click Start to begin the cleaning cycle.

The power light flashes throughout the cleaning cycle and stays on when the cleaning cycle is
finished.
be able to print.
6. When the cleaning cycle is finished, you can check to see if the nozzles are clean; click Print Nozzle
Check Pattern and click Print.
291
Print head is clean
• If there are no gaps, click Finish.

• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, click Clean to clean the print head again.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 3 times, turn off the product and wait
at least 12 hours. Then check the print head nozzles and try cleaning the print head again, if necessary.
If quality still does not improve, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related tasks
Print Head Alignment

If your printouts become grainy or blurry, you notice misalignment of vertical lines, or you see dark or
light horizontal bands, you may need to align the print head.
Note: Banding may also occur if your print head nozzles need cleaning.

292
You can align the print head using the control panel on your product.
4. Select Maintenance > Print Head Alignment.
5. Select one of the following options:
• Ruled Line Alignment if vertical lines in your printout are misaligned.
• Horizontal Alignment if your printout contains horizontal banding.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to print an alignment sheet.
Note: Do not cancel printing while you are printing head alignment patterns.
Parent topic: Print Head Alignment

Related references
Slanted Printout
Grainy Printout
Related tasks

You can adjust the print quality using the control panel on your product.
4. Select Maintenance > Print Quality Adjustment.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to print a nozzle check pattern.
293
6. Check the printed pattern.
Print head is clean

• If there are no gaps, select O .
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select X.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to print an alignment sheet.
Note: Do not cancel printing while you are printing head alignment patterns.
9. Continue following the on-screen instructions to finish the print quality adjustment.
Parent topic: Print Head Alignment
Related references
Slanted Printout
Grainy Printout
Related tasks

If you see ink on the back of a printout, you can clean the paper guide rollers to remove any excess ink.
1. If printouts are smeared or scuffed, load plain paper in the paper source that you want to clean in this
size: Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) or A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]).
294
3. Select Maintenance > Paper Guide Cleaning.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to clean the paper guide.
5. Repeat these steps as necessary until the paper comes out clean.
Related references
Grainy Printout
Related tasks
Cleaning the Translucent Film

If the print quality has not improved after aligning the print head and cleaning the paper path, the
translucent film inside the product may be smeared with ink.
To clean the printer head path, use the following:
• Several cotton swabs
• ¼ cup (59 ml) water containing 2 to 3 drops of mild dish detergent
• A small flashlight
Caution: Do not use any other liquid to clean the translucent film or you may damage your product.
1. Turn off the product.

2. Unplug the power cable.
3. Disconnect any connected cables.
295
4. Open the printer cover.
5. Using the flashlight, check the translucent film shown here for ink smears.
296
1 Translucent film
2 Print head rail
Caution: Do not touch the print head rail or you may not be able to print. Do not wipe off the grease
on the rail.
6. Moisten a cotton swab with the water and detergent mixture and squeeze out any excess moisture,
then lightly wipe the ink off the translucent film.
Caution: Do not press too hard on the film or you may dislocate the anchor springs and damage
your product.
7. Use a new, dry cotton swab to dry the translucent film.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 as necessary to clean all ink smears.
9. When the translucent film is dry and free of any fibers, close the printer cover.
10. Reconnect any disconnected cables, plug in the power cord, and turn on the product.
Checking the Number of Sheets on the LCD Screen

You can view the number of sheets of paper that have fed through the product on the LCD screen.
2. Select Settings > Print Counter.
3. View the number of prints (In Total, B&W Prints and Color Prints).
297
4. Select Print Sheet and follow the on-screen instructions to print a detailed sheet of the printer's
usage history.
298
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
See these sections if you need to clean or transport your product.
Cleaning Your Product
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
Cleaning Your Product

To keep your product working at its best, you should clean it several times a year.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, benzene, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may
damage it. Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it. Close the rear
paper feed slot when you are not using it, to keep out dust.

2. Clean the outer case and control panel with a soft, clean cloth that has been dampened with water.
For stubborn dirt, add a small amount of mild detergent to the damp cloth.
Note: Do not touch the parts shown in the following image. This may cause a malfunction.
299
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product

You can clean the scanner glass if your copies or scanned images are smeared.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
Warning: Do not trap your fingers when opening or closing the document cover or you may be injured.
1. Open the document cover.

2. Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to clean the surface of the scanner glass.
Note: If the glass is stained with grease or dirt, use a small amount of glass cleaner on a soft, dry
cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid after removing the dirt.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with
any force. Be careful not to scratch or damage the glass; this can affect scan quality.
300
3. Close the document cover.
Related references
Incorrect Colors
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images
Fax Quality is Poor

You can clean the ADF if you see lines or streaks in your copies or scanned images.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
1. Open the ADF cover.
301
2. Use a soft, lint-free cloth (microfiber is recommended) moistened with a little water to clean the
rollers and the interior of the ADF.
Caution: Do not use a dry cloth; you may damage the ADF rollers. Do not use the ADF until the
rollers have dried.
302
3. Close the ADF cover and open the document cover.
4. Clean the areas indicated in the image:
303
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with
any force. Be careful not to scratch or damage the glass; this can affect scan quality.
Note: If the glass is stained with grease or dirt, use a small amount of glass cleaner on a soft, dry
cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid after removing the dirt.
If a black line appears when copying from the ADF, location B in the following image may be dirty. Place
the marked copy (A) on the scanner glass and clean the portion of the glass that lines up with the black
line. Clean the same location on the underside of the ADF as well.

Related references
Fax Quality is Poor

If you need to store your product or transport it a long distance, prepare it for transportation as described
here.
304
Caution: During transportation and storage, follow these guidelines:
• Because the product is heavy, two or more people should lift and carry it using the hand positions
shown here:
• When carrying the printer, avoid tilting it more than 10° or the printer may fall.
• If additional paper cassettes are installed, uninstall them before lifting the printer.
• Avoid tilting the product, placing it vertically, or turning it upside down; otherwise ink may leak.
• Leave the ink packs installed. Removing the packs can dry out the print head and may prevent the
product from printing.
Note: Before storing your product for a long period, replace low, expended, or expired ink to help
prevent the print head from drying out. Store your product in a cool, dry place.

2. Wait for the power light to turn off, then unplug the power cable.
3. Disconnect any connected cables or devices.
4. Remove all the paper from the product.
5. Lift up the printer cover.
6. Make sure the print head is in the home position on the right.
305
7. Secure the print head to the case with tape as shown.
Caution: Do not touch the translucent film inside the product; otherwise, you may damage your
product.
8. Lower the printer cover.
306
9. Unlock and open the front cover.
10. If you have the protective material that shipped with your product, use it to secure the ink pack trays.
11. When you are finished, close and lock the front cover.
307
12. Uninstall any optional paper cassettes, if necessary.
Note: Uninstall the cassettes by performing the installation steps in reverse.
308
13. Prepare the printer for packing as shown below.
14. Remove the output tray.
15. Place the product in its original packing materials, if possible, or use equivalent materials with
cushioning around the product.
Keep the product level during transportation. If print quality has declined when you print again, clean and
align the print head. Make sure you remove the tape securing the print head and the protective material
attached to the ink pack trays before using the printer.
309
Related tasks
310
Administering Your Product
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure your product's administrator settings using the Web
Config software.
Note: Before you can configure system administration settings, you must connect the product to a
network.

Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config
Configuring Product Settings
Configuring Security Settings
Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft)
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software

You can select your product's network settings and confirm its operating status using a web browser.
You do this by accessing your product's built-in Web Config utility from a computer or other device that is
connected to the same network as your product.
Note: You can also access the Web Config utility from the product information area in the Epson Smart
Panel app.
1. Print a network status sheet.

2. Locate the IP address for your product that is listed on the network status sheet.
3. On a computer or other device connected to the same network as your product, open a web
browser.
4. Enter your product's IP address into the address bar.
Note: The printer uses a self-signed certificate when accessing HTTPS. This may cause a warning
message when you access Web Config. This does not indicate a problem and can be ignored.
5. On the first visit to the Web Config utility, you will be prompted to set an administrator password. The
administrator password is required to access the full capabilities of the Web Config utility.
311
You see the available Web Config utility options.
Note: The administrator password is required to access the full capabilities of the Web Config utility. The
default password is the product's serial number. Check the label on your product to locate the serial
number.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product

Related tasks
Checking Status Information
Managing the Network Connection
Setting Control Panel Options
Sending Email Notifications
Exporting Settings Using Web Config
Importing Settings Using Web Config
Updating Firmware Using Web Config
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server
Clearing the Internal Memory
Adjusting the Contact List View Options
312
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely
Restoring Default Product Settings

You can set an administrator password using your product's control panel, Web Config, or EpsonNet
Config. You use the same administrator password in all cases.
Note: If you forget your administrator password, contact Epson for support.
1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab.

2. Select Change Administrator Password.
3. Enter a user name, if necessary.
• If you have set an administrator password before, enter the current password, then enter and
confirm the new password in the fields provided.
• If you have not set an administrator password before, enter a new password and confirm it in the
fields provided.
5. Click OK.
Note: To restore the administrator password to the default value, select Restore Default Settings on
the Change Administrator Password screen.

Related tasks
Configuring Product Settings

Follow the instructions in these sections to configure your product's control panel settings using the Web
Config software.
313
Importing and Exporting Product Settings

You can check information about the printer using the Web Config interface.
Note: Depending on the features of your product, not all of the options below may be available. Some
options are not available unless you are logged in to the Web Config interface.
1. Enter the IP address of the printer to access Web Config and log in as an administrator, if necessary.
2. Select the Status tab and choose one of the following options:
• Select Product Status to view information such as ink level and maintenance box status.
• Select Network Status to view network information such as the IP address and network
connection status.
• Select Usage Status to view information about the number of prints and historical information
about the product.
• Select Hardware Status to view information about the product functions.
• Select Job History to view information about the jobs completed on the product.
• Select Panel Snapshot to view a image of the current LCD screen.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
314
Related tasks

You can check or update the network information for your product using the Web Config interface.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log in as an administrator.
2. Select the Network tab, then select Basic.
3. Check or update the settings as necessary.
4. Select Next to see a summary of the network settings.
5. Select OK to accept the changes.
Note: The network connection will be temporarily interrupted to enable the new settings.
6. Select the other network options as necessary:

• Wi-Fi: Displays the current wireless network connection information. Select Setup to run the
wireless setup again or Disable Wi-Fi to turn off Wi-Fi.
• Wired LAN: Displays the current settings for the wired connection. Change the settings as
necessary and then select Next to view the changes. Confirm the information and select OK to
apply the changes.
• Wi-Fi Direct: Displays the current settings for the Wi-Fi Direct network. Adjust the settings as
necessary and select Next to view the changes. Confirm the information and select OK to apply
the changes.
Network Settings
Related tasks
Network Settings
The following network settings are available under the Network tab in the Web Config interface.
Basic
315
Setting Description
Device Name Displays the Device Name. You can enter a new name to
change the name of the device.
Location Displays a user-entered location for the printer
Obtain IP Address Sets the IP Address; if set to Manual, enter the information in
the appropriate fields
Set using BOOTP Enables IP addressing using BOOTP
Set using Automatic Private IP Enables IP addressing using APIPA
Addressing (APIPA)
IP Address Displays the IP address. If you are manually entering the IP
address, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a
number between 0 and 255). Make sure the address is
unique and does not conflict with any other device on your
network.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask. If you are manually entering the
subnet mask, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where
xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
Default Gateway Displays the default gateway address. If you are manually
setting the default gateway, enter it in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
DNS Server Setting Selects the DNS server setting. If the Obtain IP Address
setting is set to Manual, this setting is also set to Manual.
Primary DNS Server Enter the address of the primary DNS server in the format
Secondary DNS Server Enter the address of the secondary DNS server in the format
DNS Host Name Setting Sets the DNS Host Name selection method
DNS Host Name Displays the current DNS Host Name.
DNS Domain Name Setting Sets the DNS Domain Name selection method
316
Setting Description
DNS Domain Name Specifies the DNS domain name. The name must conform to
the following format:
• Enter between 2 and 249 characters using only the
characters "A-Z", "a-z", "0-9", hyphen "-", and a period "."
• The first character cannot be a "0-9", hyphen "-", or a
period "."
• The last character cannot be a hyphen "-" or a period "."
• Each label in the domain name must be between 1 and 63
characters and separated by a period.
• The total number of characters in the host and domain
name must not exceed 251.
Register the network interface Allows you to register the host and domain names through a
address to DNS DHCP server that supports Dynamic DNS
Proxy Server Setting Enables the use of a proxy server
Proxy Server Specifies the name of the proxy server in either IPv4 or
FQDN format
Proxy Server Port Number Specifies the port number for the proxy server (between 1
and 65535)
Proxy Server User Name Specifies the user name for the proxy server (0-255 ASCII
characters [0x20-0x7E])
Proxy Server Password Specifies the password for the proxy server (0-255 ASCII
characters [0x20-0x7E])
IPv6 Setting Enables the use of IPv6 addressing
IPv6 Privacy Extension Enables the use of private IPv6 addresses
IPv6 DHCP Server Setting Enables the use of a IPv6 DHCP server
317
Setting Description
IPv6 Address Specifies the IPv6 address. The address must conform to the
following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx / prefix
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits, and the
prefix is a decimal number from 1 to 128.
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted).
IPv6 Address Default Gateway Specifies the IPv6 address of the default gateway. The
address must conform to the following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted).
IPv6 Link-Local Address Displays the valid IPv6 Link-Local Address
IPv6 Stateful Address Displays the valid IPv6 Stateful Address
IPv6 Stateless Address 1 Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 1
IPv6 Primary DNS Server Specifies the address for the IPv6 primary DNS server. The
address must conform to the following format:
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted)
318
Setting Description
IPv6 Secondary DNS Server Specifies the address for the IPv6 secondary DNS server.
The address must conform to the following format:
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted)
IEEE802.11k/v Enables the use of IEEE802.11k/v network environments
IEEE802.11r Enables the use of IEEE802.11r network environments
Wired LAN
Setting Description
Link Speed and Duplex Selects the communication mode for the wired connection
IEEE 802.3az Enables the use of IEEE 802.3az network environments
Wi-Fi Direct
Setting Description
Wi-Fi Direct Enables the product's Wi-Fi Direct network
SSID You can change part of the SSID for the product.
Password Specifies the password for the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Note: Changing the password will disconnect any devices

currently connected to the network.
Frequency Range Selects the frequency range used by the Wi-Fi Direct
network.
IP Address Specifies the IP address for the Wi-Fi Direct network. If set to
Manual, enter the IP address in the provided fields.
Parent topic: Managing the Network Connection
319
Related tasks

You can configure the behavior of the product control panel using the Web Config interface or the menus
on the control panel.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log into Web Config as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab and set the following items as necessary:
• Language: Sets the display language
• Panel Lock: Requires an administrator login to access some menu settings on the control panel.
The administrator password must be set to enable this feature.
• Operation Timeout: Cancels operations and automatically logs out users after a selected time
period. You can select a time period between 10 seconds and 240 minutes.
Related tasks

You can set up email notifications that will be sent when an event occurs on the product. You can
register up to five destinations.
Note: You must have configured a mail server before setting up notifications.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log into Web Config as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Email Notification.
3. Set the contents of the email subject line by selecting items from the drop-down menus.
Note: You cannot select the same item in both menus. If the Location setting is longer than 32 bytes,
it will be truncated in the Subject line.
4. Enter up to five email addresses to receive the notification emails, and select the language of the
notification email.
5. In the Notification Settings area, select one or more email addresses to receive a notification for
each event.
320
6. Click OK to apply the settings.
Note: To clear the email notification settings, select Restore Default Settings. This clears all email
notification settings, not just the changes made in the current session.

Related tasks

The product can automatically enter sleep mode or turn off after it has not been used for a while. You
can set the delay before the product enters sleep mode or turns off.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Power Saving setting.
3. Set Sleep Mode to the number of minutes before the product enters a low-power mode.
4. Select Power Off Timer to set the amount to time of inactivity before the product turns off.
Note: If you are using the fax feature, select None.
Note: You can also configure the power saving settings using the control panel by selecting Settings >
General Settings > Basic Settings and selecting the feature you want to change.

Related tasks

You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Sounds setting.
321
3. Select volume and sound settings as necessary for Normal Mode and Quiet Mode. You can also
create different sound settings for fax operations.
Note: You can also configure the sound settings using the control panel by selecting Settings >
General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds.

Related tasks
Importing and Exporting Product Settings

Follow the instructions in these sections to import and export your product's settings using the Web
Config software.
You can export your product's settings and optionally encrypt the settings file with a password.
1. Access Web Config and select Export and Import Setting Value.
2. Select Export.
3. Select the settings you want to export.
Note: If you select a parent category, the child categories are also selected. By default, items that
are unique on the network, such as IP address, cannot be selected. If you want to export these
items, select Enable to select the individual settings of device. It is recommended that you
export only unique items when replacing a product on the network, otherwise you may encounter
conflicts on the network.
4. Enter an encryption password, if desired.

5. Click Export and save the file.
Parent topic: Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Related tasks
322
You can import settings to your product that you have exported previously. If encryption was used when
the settings were exported, obtain the necessary password before you import.
1. Access Web Config and select Export and Import Setting Value.
2. Select Import.
3. Click Browse and select the exported settings file.
4. If necessary, enter the decryption password.
5. Click Next.
6. Select the settings to import and click Next.
7. Click OK.
The selected settings are imported to the product.
Parent topic: Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Related tasks

If your product is connected to the Internet, you can update the product firmware using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config and select Device Management > Firmware Update.
2. Click Start to check for the latest firmware.
3. If there is a firmware update, click Start to begin the update.
Note: Make sure the product is not in use and clear any errors on the LCD screen before starting the
update. You can also schedule a firmware update by selecting Automatic Firmware Update from
the menu.

Related tasks

You can synchronize the product with an NTP time server to set the date and time on the product.
323
Note: If you are using a CA certificate or Kerberos authentication, it is recommended to use a time
server to set the date and time.

2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Date and Time > Time Server setting.
3. Set Use Time Server to Use.
4. Enter the time server address in Time Server Address. You can use the IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN
format for the address. You are limited to 252 characters.
5. Enter an update interval (up to 10080 minutes) in Update Interval (min).
6. Click OK to update the settings.
Related references
Related tasks

You can delete the contents of the product's internal memory, such as password-protected print jobs and
downloaded PCL fonts and macros using the Web Config interface. You cannot select individual items to
delete.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Clear Internal Memory Data setting.
3. Select Delete and confirm your selection.
Related references
Related tasks

You can adjust the way contacts are listed on the product's LCD screen. You can also configure the way
searches are performed when searching the contact list.
324
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Contacts Manager setting.
3. Select either Tile View or List View to control how the contacts are displayed on the product's LCD
screen.
4. Select an search option from the Search Options drop-down list.
5. Select OK to apply your changes.
Related tasks

You can set a schedule to clean the print head using the Web Config interface.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Periodic Cleaning setting.
• To clean the print head after a print job, select After Printing.
• To run a cleaning cycle at a specific time, select Schedule and choose a time from the drop-down
list.
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Related tasks

You can power off or reboot the product using the Web Config interface.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Power setting.
3. Select a power option from the drop down menu and select Execute.
Note: After turning off the product, you cannot access Web Config until the product is turned on again.
325
Related tasks

You can reset the product to the default settings using the Web Config interface.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Restore Default Settings setting.
3. Select an option from the drop-down list. You can either restore network settings or all data and
settings.
4. Select Execute and confirm your selection to restore the product settings
Related references
Related tasks
Configuring Security Settings

Follow the instructions in these sections to configure internal security features for your product using the
Web Config software.
Connecting an Authentication Device
Restricting Features Available for Users
Setting Up Password Encryption
Working with Audit Logs
Restricting PDL File Operations
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up
Restricting Domain Access
326
You can connect an authentication device such as an IC card reader using a USB cable, and check the
functionality of the reader using the Web Config interface.
1. Remove the sticker covering the service port on the rear of the product.
2. Connect the card reader’s USB cable to the service port on the product.
3. Access Web Config and log in using the administrator name and password.
Note: You can also check the card reader status on the product control panel by selecting Settings
> Authentication Device Status.
327
4. Select Device Management > Card Reader.
5. Set the card reader parameters as necessary.
6. Select Check to verify the connection status of the authentication device.
Note: To confirm that the authentication device can recognize an authentication card, hold the card
over the reader while you select Check.
7. Click Next.
8. Click OK to confirm the settings.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Related references
Cannot Read the Authentication Card

Follow the instructions in these sections to restrict users from using certain product features and create
an administrator password to lock the restrictions using the Web Config software.
User Feature Restriction
Configuring User Feature Restrictions
Related references
User Feature Restriction
You can restrict available product features for individual users, with different features available to each
user. This requires users to log into the product control panel with their user name and password before
they can use control panel features.
With Windows, you can also restrict printing and scanning from the product software. This requires users
to log into the printing or scanning software, and allows the software to authenticate the users before
printing or scanning proceeds. For instructions on setting up software restrictions, see the help utility in
the printing or scanning software.
Parent topic: Restricting Features Available for Users
328
Configuring User Feature Restrictions
You can create up to 10 user accounts and restrict access to control panel features separately for each
one.
1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab.
2. Select the Enables Access Control checkbox.
3. If you have configured the product for an LDAP server or IEEE 802.1x network, you can deselect the
Allows printing and scanning without authentication information from a computer checkbox
to prevent the product from receiving jobs sent from these sources:
• The default operating system driver
• A PCL or PostScript printer driver
• Web services such as Epson Connect
• Smartphones and other mobile devices
4. Click OK.
5. Select User Settings.
6. Click Add.
7. Enter a name for a user in the User Name field following the guidelines on the screen. Use ASCII
(0x20-0x7E) characters.
8. Enter a password for the user in the Password field following the guidelines on the screen.
Note: If you need to reset a password, leave the password field blank.
9. Select the checkbox for each function you want the user to be able to perform, and deselect the
checkbox for each function you want to restrict access to.
10. Click Apply.
Note: When you edit a completed user account, you see a Delete option. Click it to delete a user, if
necessary.
Note: You can import and export a list of user features using EpsonNet Config. See the help utility in the
software for instructions.
Parent topic: Restricting Features Available for Users
329
You can restrict the ability to connect from a computer using a USB connection or accessing a
connected USB device or memory card.
Note: Depending on your product features, not all of the options listed below may be available.
1. Access Web Config and select Product Security > External Interface.
2. Select Memory Device and do one of the following:
• Select Disable to prevent access to a USB device or memory card.
• Select Enable to allow access to a USB device or memory card.
3. Select PC Connection via USB and do one of the following:
• Select Disable to prevent a computer from connecting to the product over a USB connection
• Select Enable to allow a computer to connect to the product over a USB connection
4. Click OK to save your setting.
Related references
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device
Related topics
Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Setting Up Password Encryption

You can set up password encryption to protect confidential information stored in the product.
2. Select the Product Security tab and select Password Encryption.
3. Select Onand select OK.
A message appears about restarting the product. Select OK.
4. Turn the product off and then on again to apply the password encryption setting.
Note: The product may take longer than usual to turn on. This is normal.
330
Working with Audit Logs

You can enable the Audit Log feature or export audit log data using the Web Config interface. Audit logs
can be used to track security issues or identify improper usage.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Audit Log setting.
3. Select ON to enable the audit log feature.
4. Select Export to export the audit log data to a CSV file, or select Delete to delete all audit logs.
Restricting PDL File Operations

You can protect files from unauthorized PDL operations using the Web Config interface.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the File Operations from PDL setting.
3. Select Allowed or Not Allowed to enable or disable PDL file operations and select OK to apply your
setting.
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up

You can check whether unauthorized third parties have tampered with the program when the product
starts up using the Web Config interface.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Program Verification on Start Up setting.
3. Select ON and then select OK to apply the setting.
Restricting Domain Access

You can set up restrictions on the email domains that can be used for email notifications using the Web
Config interface.
331
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Domain Restrictions setting.
3. Select a restriction method for the Restriction Rule setting. Select Allow Sending to limit sending
emails to the listed domains or select Deny Sending to prevent emails from being sent to the listed
domains.
4. Add the necessary domains to the list by entering them in the Domain Name field and selecting
Add.
The domain is added to the list. To delete domain, select the checkbox next to the domain name and
select Delete.
5. Select OK to apply your changes.
Using Your Product on a Secure Network

Follow the instructions in these sections to configure security features for your product on the network
using the Web Config software.
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Using a Digital Certificate
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config

You can enable or disable protocols using Web Config.
1. Select or deselect the checkbox next to the service name to enable or disable a protocol.
2. Configure any other available protocol settings.
3. Click Next.
4. Click OK.
5. Select and configure services and protocol settings as necessary.
After the protocols restart, the changes are applied.
Protocol Settings
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
332
Protocol Settings
Protocols
Name Description
Bonjour Bonjour is used to search for devices and AirPrint
iBeacon Enable the iBeacon setting to search for the product from
iBeacon-enabled devices
SLP SLP is used for push-scanning and network searching in
EpsonNet Config
WSD Add WSD devices, or print and scan from the WSD port
LLTD Displays the product on the Windows network map
LLMNR Use name resolution without NetBIOS even if you cannot use
DNS
LPR Print from to the LPR port
RAW(Port9100) Print from the RAW port (Port 9100)
RAW(Custom Port) Print from the RAW port (custom port)
IPP Print over the Internet, including AirPrint
FTP Print over FTP
SNMPv1/v2c Remotely set up and monitor your product
SNMPv3 Remotely set up and monitor your product with the SNMPv3
protocol
Bonjour Settings
Setting Options/Description
Use Bonjour Search for or use devices through Bonjour (you cannot use
AirPrint if disabled)
Bonjour Name Displays the Bonjour name
Bonjour Service Name Displays the Bonjour service name
Location Displays the Bonjour location name
333
Top Priority Protocol Selects the protocol that is the top priority for Bonjour printing
Wide-Area Bonjour Enables the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol; register all products
on the DNS server to locate them over the segment
iBeacon Settings
Enable iBeacon Transmission Enable the iBeacon transmission function
SLP Settings
Enable SLP Enable the SLP function to use the Push Scan function and
network searching in EpsonNet Config
WSD Settings
Enable WSD Enable adding devices using WSD, and printing and scanning
from the WSD port
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD printing
between 3 and 3,600 seconds
Scanning Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD scanning
Device Name Displays the WSD device name
Location Displays the WSD location name
LLTD Settings
Enable LLTD Enable LLTD to display the product in the Windows network
map
334
Device Name Displays the LLTD device name
LLMNR Settings
Enable LLMNR Enable LLMNR to use name resolution without NetBIOS, even
if you cannot use DNS
LPR Settings
Allow LPR Port Printing Allow printing from the LPR port
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for LPR printing between 0 and 3,600
seconds
RAW (Port9100) Settings
Allow RAW (Port9100) Printing Allow printing from the RAW port (Port 9100)
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW port (Port 9100) printing
RAW (Custom Port) Settings
Allow RAW (Custom Port) Printing Allow printing from the RAW port (custom port)
Port Number Enter the port number for RAW printing between 1024 and
65535 (except 9100, 1865, and 2968)
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW port (custom port) printing
335
IPP Settings
Enable IPP Enable IPP communication for products that support IPP are
displayed (you cannot use AirPrint if disabled)
Allow Non-secure Communication Allow the printer to communicate without any security
measures (IPP)
Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for IPP printing between 0 and 3,600
seconds
Require PIN Code when using IPP Select whether or not to require a PIN code when using IPP
printing printing. If you select Yes, IPP print jobs without PIN codes
are not saved in the product.
URL(Network) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the product is
connected using wired LAN or Wi-Fi (the URL is a combined
value of the product’s IP address, Port number, and IPP
printer name)
URL(Wi-Fi Direct) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the product is
connected using Wi-Fi Direct (the URL is a combined value of
the product’s IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name)
Printer Name Displays the IPP printer name
Location Displays the IPP location
FTP Settings
Enable FTP Server Enable FTP printing for products that support FTP printing
Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for FTP communication between 0
and 3,600 seconds
SNMPv1/v2c Settings
Enable SNMPv1/v2c Enable SNMPv1/v2c for products that support SNMPv3
336
Access Authority Set the access authority when SNMPv1/v2c is enabled to
Read Only or Read/Write
Community Name (Read Only) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII characters
Community Name (Read/Write) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII characters
SNMPv3 Settings
Enable SNMPv3 Enable SNMPv3 for products that support SNMPv3
User Name Enter 1 to 32 characters
Authentication Settings Select an algorithm and set a password for authentication
Encryption Settings Select an algorithm and set a password for encryption
Context Name Enter 1 to 32 characters
Parent topic: Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config

Follow the instructions in these sections to configure SSL/TLS communication using Web Config.
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product
Related references
Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings
If your product supports HTTPS, you can configure SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with your
product.
1. Access Web Config and select Network Security Settings.
2. Select SSL/TLS and select Basic.
3. Select one of the options for the Encryption Strength setting.
4. Select Enable or Disable for the Redirect HTTP to HTTPS setting as necessary.
337
5. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
6. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product
You can configure a server certificate for your product.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under SSL/TLS, select Certificate.
• CA-signed Certificate: Select Import if you have obtained a CA-signed certificate. Choose the
file to import and click OK.
• Self-signed Certificate: Select Update if you have not obtained a CA (Certificate Authority)-
signed certificate and want the product to generate a self-signed certificate.
4. Click Next.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering

Follow the instructions in these sections to configure IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
About IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy
Configuring Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate
About IPsec/IP Filtering
You can filter traffic to the product over the network based on IP address, service, and port by
configuring a default policy that applies to every user or group connecting to the product. For control of
individual users or user groups, you can configure group policies.
338
Note: IPsec is supported only by computers running Windows Vista or later, or Windows Server 2008 or
later.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering

Configuring Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy
You can configure the default policy for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Basic.
3. Select Enable to enable IPsec/IP filtering.
4. Select the filtering options you want to use for the default policy.
5. Click Next.
6. Click OK.
Configuring Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies
You can configure group policies for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Basic.
3. Click a tab number for the policy number you want to configure.
4. Select the Enable this Group Policy checkbox.
5. Select the filtering options you want to use for this group policy.
6. Click Next.
7. Click OK.
8. If you want to configure additional group policies, click the next tab number and repeat the
configuration steps as necessary.
339
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings
Default Policy Settings
Access Control Permit Access to permit IP packets to pass through
Refuse Access to prevent IP packets from passing
through
IPsec to permit IPsec packets to pass through
Authentication Method Select an authentication method, or select Certificate if
you have imported a CA-signed certificate
Pre-Shared Key If necessary, enter a pre-shared key between 1 and 127
characters long
Encapsulation If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these encapsulation modes:
Transport Mode: if you are using the product on the
same LAN; IP packets of layer 4 or later are encrypted
Tunnel Mode: if you are using the product on an Internet-
capable network, such as IPsec-VPN; the header and
data of IP packets are encrypted
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode) If you selected Tunnel Mode as the Encapsulation
option, enter a gateway address between 1 and 39
characters long
Security Protocol If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these security protocols:
ESP: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data,
and encrypt data
AH: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data; if
data encryption is prohibited, you can use IPsec
340
Group Policy Settings
Access Control Permit Access to permit IP packets to pass through
Refuse Access to prevent IP packets from passing
through
IPsec to permit IPsec packets to pass through
Local Address(Printer) Select an IPv4 or IPv6 address that matches your network
environment; if the IP address is assigned automatically,
select Use auto-obtained IPv4 address
Remote Address(Host) Enter the device's IP address (between 0 and 43
characters long) to control access, or leave blank to
control all addresses; if the IP address is assigned
automatically, such as by DHCP, the connection may be
unavailable, so configure a static address instead
Method of Choosing Port Select the method you want to used for specifying ports
Service Name If you selected Service Name as the Method of
Choosing Port option, select a service name option here;
see the next table for more information
Transport Protocol If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, select one of these encapsulation modes:
Any Protocol
TCP
UDP
ICMPv4
See the Group Policy Guidelines table for more
information.
Local Port If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, and TCP or UDP for the Transport Protocol
option, enter the port numbers that control receiving
packets (up to 10 ports), separated by commas, for
example 25,80,143,5220; leave this setting blank to
control all ports; see the next table for more information
341
Remote Port If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, and TCP or UDP for the Transport Protocol
option, enter the port numbers that control sending
packets (up to 10 ports), separated by commas, for
example 25,80,143,5220; leave this setting blank to
control all ports; see the next table for more information
Authentication Method If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select an authentication method here
Pre-Shared Key If you selected Pre-Shared Key as the Authentication
Method option, enter a pre-shared key between 1 and
127 characters long here and in the Confirm Pre-Shared
Key field
Encapsulation If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these encapsulation modes:
Transport Mode: if you are using the product on the
same LAN; IP packets of layer 4 or later are encrypted
Tunnel Mode: if you are using the product on an Internet-
capable network, such as IPsec-VPN; the header and
data of IP packets are encrypted
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode) If you selected Tunnel Mode as the Encapsulation
option, enter a gateway address between 1 and 39
characters long
Security Protocol If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these security protocols:
ESP: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data,
and encrypt data
AH: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data; if
data encryption is prohibited, you can use IPsec
Group Policy Guidelines
342
Service name Protocol type Local/Remote port Controls these operations
number
ENPC UDP 3289/Any port Searching for a product from
applications such as printer or
scanner drivers, or EpsonNet Config
SNMP UDP 161/Any port Acquiring and configuring MIB from
applications such as printer or
scanner drivers, or EpsonNet Config
LPR TCP 515/Any port Forwarding LPR data
RAW (Port9100) TCP 9100/any port Forwarding RAW data
IPP/IPPS TCP 631/Any port Forwarding AirPrint data (IPP/IPPS
printing)
WSD TCP Any port/5357 Controlling WSD
WS-Discovery UDP 3702/Any port Searching for a product from WSD
Network Scan TCP 1865/Any port Forwarding scan data from
Document Capture Pro
Network Push Scan TCP Any port/2968 Acquiring job information on push
scanning from Document Capture
Pro
Network Push Scan UDP 2968/Any port Searching for a computer during
Discovery push scanning from Document
Capture Pro
FTP Data (Local) TCP 20/Any port Forwarding FTP printing data to FTP
server
FTP Control (Local) TCP 21/Any port Controlling FTP printing to FTP
server
FTP Data (Remote) TCP Any port/20 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to FTP client; controls only
an FTP server that uses remote port
20
FTP Control TCP Any port/21 Forwarding scan data and received
(Remote) fax data to FTP client
343
Service name Protocol type Local/Remote port Controls these operations
number
CIFS (Local)* TCP 445/Any port Sharing a network folder on CIFS
server
CIFS (Remote)* TCP Any port/445 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to a folder on CIFS server
NetBIOS Name UDP 137/Any port Sharing a network folder on CIFS
Service (Local) server
NetBIOS Datagram UDP 138/Any port
Service (Local)
NetBIOS Session TCP 139/Any port
Service (Local)
NetBIOS Name UDP Any port/137 Forwarding scan data and received
Service (Remote) fax data to a folder on CIFS server
NetBIOS Datagram UDP Any port/138
(Remote)
NetBIOS Session TCP Any port/139
Service (Remote)
HTTP (Local) TCP 80/Any port Forwarding Web Config and WSD
data to a HTTP or HTTPS server
HTTPS (Local) TCP 443/Any port
HTTP (Remote) TCP Any port/80 Communicating with Epson Connect,
firmware update, and root certificate
HTTPS (Remote) TCP Any port/443
update on a HTTP or HTTPS client
* To control forwarding of scan and received fax data, share a network folder, or receive fax data from
PC-Fax, select Port Number as the Method of Choosing Port option and specify the port numbers for
CIFS and NetBIOS.
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples
You can configure IPsec and IP filtering in a variety of ways, as shown in the examples here.
344
Receiving IPsec Packets Only
Use this example only for configuring a default policy.
• IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
• Access Control: IPsec
• Authentication Method: Pre-Shared Key
• Pre-Shared Key: Enter a key up to 127 characters long
Receiving Printing Data and Printer Settings

Use this example to allow communication of printing data and printer settings from specified services.
Default policy:
• Access Control: Refuse Access
Group policy:
• Access Control: Permit Access
• Remote Address(Host): Client IP address
• Method of Choosing Port: Service Name
• Service Name: Select ENPC, SNMP, HTTP (Local), HTTPS (Local), and RAW (Port9100)
Receiving Access from Only a Specified Address for Product Access

In these examples, the client will be able to access and configure the product in any policy configuration.
Default policy:
• Access Control: Refuse Access
Group policy:
• Access Control: Permit Access
• Remote Address (Host): Administrator's client IP address
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate
You can configure a certificate for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
345
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Client Certificate.
3. Click Import to add a new client certificate and enter any necessary settings.
4. Click OK.
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network

Follow the instructions in these sections to connect the product to an IEEE 802.1X network using Web
Config.
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings
Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Status
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network
If your product supports IEEE 802.1X, you can use it on a network with authentication provided by a
RADIUS server with a hub as an authenticator using Web Config.
2. Under IEEE802.1X, select Basic.
3. Select Enable as the IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) setting.
4. To use the product on a Wi-Fi network, enable your product's Wi-Fi settings. See your product's
User's Guide for instructions.
The status of the connection is shown as the IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) setting.
Note: You can share the network settings for Ethernet and Wi-Fi networking.
5. Select the IEEE 802.1X setting options you want to use.

6. Click Next.
7. Click OK.
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
346
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings
You can configure these IEEE 802.1X network settings in Web Config.
EAP Type Select one of these authentication methods for connections
between the product and a RADIUS server:
EAP-TLS or PEAP-TLS: You must obtain and import a CA-
signed certificate
PEAP/MSCHAPv2: You must configure a password
User ID Enter an ID for authentication on a RADIUS server
Password Enter a password for authentication of the product.
Confirm Password Enter the authentication password again
Server ID Enter a server ID for authentication on a specified RADIUS
server; server ID is verified in the subject/subjectAltName field
of a server certificate sent from the RADIUS server
Anonymous Name If you selected PEAP-TLS or PEAP/MSCHAPv2 as the
Authentication Method setting, you can configure an
anonymous name instead of a user ID for phase 1 of a PEAP
authentication
Encryption Strength Select one of the following encryption strengths:
High for AES256/3DES
Middle for AES256/3DES/AES128/RC4

Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network
If your product supports IEEE 802.1X, you can configure a certificate for the network using Web Config.
2. Under IEEE802.1X, select Client Certificate.
3. Click Import to add a new client certificate.
4. Click OK.
347
IEEE 802.1X Network Status
You can check the status of the IEEE 802.1X network settings by printing a status sheet from your
product.
The network status sheet displays the information in this table for IEEE 802.1X networks.
Status ID Status description

Disable IEEE 802.1X is disabled
EAP Success IEEE 802.1X authentication is confirmed and the network connection is
available
Authenticating IEEE 802.1X authentication in progress
Config Error Authentication failed because the user ID was not set
Client Certificate Error Authentication failed because the client certificate is out of date
Timeout Error Authentication failed because there is no answer from the RADIUS server
and/or authenticator
User ID Error Authentication failed because the product's user ID and/or certificate
protocol is incorrect
Server ID Error Authentication failed because the server ID on the server certificate and
the server's ID do not match
Server Certificate Error Authentication failed because the server certificate is out of date or the
chain of the server certificate is incorrect
CA Certificate Error Authentication failed because the CA certificate is incorrect, not imported,
or out of date
EAP Failure Authentication failed because the client certificate is incorrect (EAP-TLS
or PEAP-TLS), or the user ID or password is incorrect
(PEAP/MSCHAPv2)

Follow the instructions in these sections to configure and use digital certificates using Web Config.
About Digital Certification
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
348
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate
Updating a Self-signed Certificate
Importing a CA Certificate
Deleting a CA Certificate
Related references
About Digital Certification
You can configure the following digital certificates for your network using Web Config:
CA-signed Certificate
You can ensure secure communications using a CA-signed certificate for each security feature. The
certificates must be signed by and obtained from a CA (Certificate Authority).
Self-signed Certificate
A self-signed certificate is issued and signed by the product itself. You can use the certificate for only
SSL/TLS communication, however security is unreliable and you may see a security alert in the
browser during use.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
You can obtain a CA-signed certificate by creating a CSR (Certificate Signing Request) using Web
Config and submitting it to a certificate authority. The CSR created in Web Config is in PEM/DER format.
You can import one CSR created from Web Config at a time.
1. Access Web Config and select Network Security.
2. Select one of the available network security options and select a certificate option.
3. In the CSR section, select Generate.
4. Select the CSR setting options you want to use.
5. Click OK.
You see a completion message.
349
6. In the CSR section, click the Download option that matches the format specified by your certificate
authority to download the CSR.
Caution: Do not generate another CSR or you may not be able to import a CA-signed certificate.
7. Submit the CSR to the certificate authority following the format guidelines provided by that authority.
8. Save the issued CA-signed certificate to a computer connected to the product.
Before proceeding, make sure the time and date settings are correct on your product. See the
product's User's Guide for instructions.
9. In the CA Certificate section, click Import.
10. Select the format of the certificate as the Server Certificate setting.
11. Select the certificate import settings as necessary for the format and the source from which you
obtained it.
12. Click OK.
13. Click Confirm to verify the certificate information.
Related references
Cannot Update a Certificate or Create a CSR
Cannot Import a Digital Certificate
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Deleted a CA-signed Certificate
CSR Setup Settings
You can select these settings when setting up a CSR in Web Config.
Note: The available key length and abbreviations vary by certificate authority, so follow the rules of that
authority when entering information in the CSR.
Key Length Select a key length for the CSR
350
Common Name Enter a name or static IP address from 1 to 128
characters long; for example, Reception printer
or https://10.152.12.225
Organization, Organizational Unit, Locality, Enter information in each field as necessary, from
State/Province 0 to 64 characters long in ASCII; separate any
multiple names with commas
Country Enter a two-digit country code number as specified
by the ISO-3166 standard

Related references
Related tasks
CSR Import Settings
You can configure these settings when importing a CSR in Web Config.
Note: The import setting requirements vary by certificate format and how you obtained the certificate.
Certificate format Setting descriptions

PEM/DER format obtained from Web Config Private Key: Do not configure because the
product contains a private key
Password: Do not configure
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional
PEM/DER format obtained from a computer Private Key: Configure a private key
Password: Do not configure
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional
351
Certificate format Setting descriptions
PKCS#12 format obtained from a computer Private Key: Do not configure
Password: Optional
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Do not
configure

Related references
Related tasks
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate
You can delete an imported CA-signed certificate with Web Config when the certificate expires or if you
have no more need for an encrypted connection.
Note: If you obtained a CA-signed certificate from Web Config, you cannot import a deleted certificate;
you must obtain and import a new certificate.

2. Click Delete.
3. Click OK.
Updating a Self-signed Certificate
If your product supports the HTTPS server feature, you can update a self-signed certificate using Web
Config.
1. Access Web Config and select Network Security, select SSL/TLS, and select Certificate.
2. Click Update.
3. Enter an identifier for your product from 1 to 128 characters long in the Common Name field.
352
4. Select a validity period for the certificate as the Certificate Validity (year) setting.
5. Click Next.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Confirm to verify the certificate information.
You can import a CA certificate using Web Config.
2. Select CA Certificate.
3. Select Import.
4. Select the CA certificate you want to import.
5. Click OK.
When you see the CA Certificate page and the imported certificate is displayed, the import is finished.
Related references
Deleting a CA Certificate
You can delete an imported CA certificate with Web Config when the certificate expires or if you have no
more need for an encrypted connection.
1. Access Web Config and select Network Security Settings.
2. Select CA Certificate.
3. Locate the certificate you want to remove and click the Delete button next to it.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
5. Click Reboot Network, and then check that the deleted CA Certificate is not listed on the updated
screen.
353
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft)
You can set up your product for use with Universal Print if you are using Microsoft 365 and Azure Active
Directory.
Note: This feature is supported on Windows 10 2004 (20H1) or later. Visit the Microsoft website for more
information.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab.

2. Select Universal Print.
3. Select Register.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to register your product.
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software

With Windows, you can discover and monitor remote devices, and configure network settings in a batch
operation. See the Epson Device Admin help for instructions.
To install Epson Device Admin, download the software from the support page at epson.com/support
(U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Caribbean) and follow the on-screen
instructions.
354
Solving Problems
Check these sections for solutions to problems you may have using your product.
Viewing the Help Screen
Running a Product Check
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
Solving Setup Problems
Solving Network Problems
Solving Network Security Problems
Solving Copying Problems
Solving Copy Quality Problems
Solving Paper Problems
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Solving Print Quality Problems
Solving Scanning Problems
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Solving Faxing Problems
Solving USB Device Problems
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)
Viewing the Help Screen

You can view troubleshooting or how-to topics on the LCD screen at any time.
1. Select the help icon.
355
You see this screen:
2. Select Troubleshooting or How To to view instructional images or animations.

Parent topic: Solving Problems

You can often diagnose problems with your product by checking the messages and status icons on its
LCD screen. You can also check for errors by pressing the Job/Status button and selecting Printer
Status.
Note: If the screen is dark, press the screen to wake the product from sleep mode.
356
LCD screen message Condition/solution
Printer error. Turn the power off and Turn the product off and then back on again. If the error persists,
on again. If the problem persists, check for and remove any jammed paper or protective materials
contact Epson support. from the product. If the error still persists, contact Epson for
support.
If you see any of the following error codes, make sure you have
not exceeded the loading capacity for any paper source:
• 000181
• 000184
Printer error. Contact Epson support. The product may be damaged, but features such as scanning
Non-printing features are available. are still available. Contact Epson for support.
Printer error. For details, see your The product may be damaged. Contact Epson for support.
documentation.
Paper out in XX. Load Paper. Paper Load the size and type of paper in the paper source indicated.
Size: XX/Paper Type: XX
Too many paper cassette units are You can install up to three optional paper cassette units.
installed. Turn the power off and Remove any extra units.
uninstall the extra units. See your
documentation for details.
Unsupported Paper Cassette Units Unsupported optional paper cassette units are installed.
have been installed. Turn the power Remove the unsupported units.
off and uninstall. For details, see
your documentation.
Cannot print because XX is out of Turn the product off and then back on again. Reinsert the
order. You can print from another indicated paper cassette. If the error persists, contact Epson for
cassette. support.
The pickup roller in XX is nearing the The paper cassette rollers need to be replaced periodically for
end of its service life. optimal performance. (Paper may not feed correctly from the
paper cassette when the roller is near the end of its service life.)
Contact Epson for support.
The pickup roller in XX has reached Replace the paper cassette roller indicated and reset the
the end of its service life. Replace it counter. Contact Epson for support.
and reset the maintenance roller
counter.
357
LCD screen message Condition/solution
You need to replace Ink Supply Replace the indicated ink packs.
Unit(s).
Paper Setup Auto Display is set to AirPrint is not available when the Paper Setup Auto Display
Off. Some features may not be setting is disabled. Change Paper Setup Auto Display to On.
available. For details, see your
documentation.
No dial tone is detected. Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the
phone line works. If you connected the product to a PBX (Private
Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal Adapter, change the
Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off
the Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone
Detection setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of
a fax number.)
Failed to receive faxes because the Press the Job/Status button and select Printer Status and
fax data capacity is full. Touch the resolve any printer errors that prevented faxes from printing.
Job/Status at the bottom of the Home Make sure the product is connected to a computer or that a USB
Screen for details. device is connected to the product.
The combination of the IP address There is a problem with the network connection to your product.
and the subnet mask is invalid. See Set up your product on the network again.
your documentation for more details.
To use cloud services, update the Access the Web Config utility and update the cloud service root
root certificate from the Epson Web certificate.
Config utility.
Check that the printer driver is Make sure the printer port is correctly configured. In Windows,
installed on the computer and that make sure the port is set to a USBXXX setting for a USB
the port settings for the printer are connection or EpsonNet Print Port for a network connection.
correct.
Recovery Mode An error has occurred during firmware updating. Connect your
product using a USB cable and try downloading the Firmware
Update Firmware
Update from the Epson support site. If you still need help,
contact Epson for support.

Related references
358
Related tasks
Related topics

If a job does not complete successfully, you can check the error code for the reason. Press the
Job/Status button, select the Job/Status tab, and select Log. Select the incomplete job to display the
error code and additional information.
Code Condition/solution
001 The product was turned off by a power failure.
101 Memory is full. Reduce the size of the print job.
102 Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Clear fonts and macros
from the product's memory using the PDL Font, Macro option on the Settings > General
Settings > System Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data menu, reduce the
size of the print job, or print one copy at a time.
103 Print quality was decreased due to a lack of available memory. If the quality of the printout
is unacceptable, try simplifying the page by reducing the number of graphics or the
number and size of the fonts.
104 Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Clear fonts and macros
from the product's memory using the PDL Font, Macro option on the Settings > General
Settings > System Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data menu or reduce the
data size of the print job.
106 Cannot print from the computer due to access control settings. Contact your product
administrator.
107 User authentication failed and the job has been canceled. Contact your product
administrator.
108 Confidential job data was deleted when the product was turned off.
359
109 The received fax was already deleted.
110 The job was printed 1-sided because the loaded paper does not support 2-sided printing.
111 Available memory is running low. Reduce the size of the print job.
120 Cannot communicate with a server using an open platform. Check the server or network
for errors.
201 The product's memory is full. You can send pages individually, or print received faxes and
delete them to free up memory space.
202 The line was disconnected by the recipient's fax machine. Wait a moment, then try again.
203 The product cannot detect a dial tone.
Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the phone line works. If you
connected the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal
Adapter, change the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the
Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the
product to drop the first digit of a fax number.)
204 The recipient's fax machine is busy. Wait a moment, then try again.
205 The recipient's fax machine does not answer. Wait a moment, then try again.
206 The phone cable is incorrectly connected to the product's LINE and EXT ports. Connect
the phone cable correctly.
207 The phone cable is not connected. Connect the phone cable.
208 The fax could not be sent to some of the specified recipients.
Print a fax log to check which recipients failed to receive the fax. If the Save Failure Data
setting is turned on, you can resend a fax from Job Status in the Job/Status menu.
301 There is not enough storage space available to save the data in the external memory
device. Clear space on the device or use a different device.
401
302 The external memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection.
402
303 No folder is available for saving the scanned file. Create a folder or use a different
memory device.
360
304 The external memory device has been removed. Reinsert the device.
404
305 An error occurred while saving data to an external memory device. Reinsert the memory
device or use a different device.
405
306 The product's memory is full. Wait until current jobs are finished processing.
311 A DNS error has occurred. Check the DNS settings for the server, computer, or access
point. DNS settings for the server can be checked from the DNS Server option in the
321
Setup menu.
411
421
312 An authentication error has occurred. Check the Server Settings in the Settings menu.
412
313 A communication error has occurred. Check the network connection or Server Settings
in the Settings menu.
413
314 The data size exceeds the maximum size for the attached files. Increase the Attached
File Max Size setting in the scan settings or lower the file size of the scanned image.
315 The memory is full. Retry after other ongoing jobs have finished.
327
316 A mail encryption error occurred. Make sure the encryption certificate setting and the
product's time setting are correct. Contact your product administrator.
317 A mail signature error occurred. Make sure the signing certificate setting and the product's
time setting are correct. Contact your product administrator.
322 An authentication error occurred. Check the Location settings.
323 A communication error has occurred. Check the Location settings or the network
connection.
324 A file with the same name already exists in the specified folder. Delete the duplicate file or
change the file name prefix in File Settings.
325 There is not enough storage space available in the specified folder. Increase the storage
space in the specified folder, delete unnecessary files, or lower the file size of the
326
scanned image.
361
328 The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist. Check the Location
settings.
330 An FTPS/FTPS secure connection error occurred. Check the location in the destination
settings. Run Epson Web Config and update the root certificate or the CA certificate.
Contact your product administrator.
331 A communication error occurred while acquiring the destination list. Make sure the
product is connected to the network correctly.
332 There is not enough space available for saving the scanned files in the specified folder.
Delete unnecessary files from the specified folder.
333 The destination could not be found because the destination information was uploaded to
the server before sending the scanned data. Select the destination again.
334 An error occurred while sending the scanned data.
341 A communication error has occurred. Make sure the product is connected to the computer
or network correctly. Make sure you have installed Document Capture Pro or Document
Capture. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your firewall or
security software.
350 An FTPS/HTTPS certificate error occurred. Check the product's date and time settings
are correct. Run Epson Web Config and update the root certificate or the CA certificate.
Contact your product administrator.
422 An authentication error has occurred. Make sure the settings are correct for the folder
selected in Save/Forward Settings in the Settings menu.
423 A communication error has occurred. It is also possible that a file with the same name is
open or the file is a read-only file.
Check the network connection, make sure the settings are correct for the folder selected
in the in Save/Forward Settings in the Settings menu, close the duplicate file, or disable
read-only protection.
425 There is not enough storage space available in the forwarding destination folder. Increase
the storage space in the destination folder.
428 The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist. Make sure the settings are
correct for the folder selected in Save/Forward Settings in the Settings menu.
362
Related references
Related tasks
Related topics

Running a product check helps you determine if your product is operating properly.
1. Disconnect any interface cables connected to your product.
2. Load plain paper in the product.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Head Nozzle Check.
5. Select Start.
The nozzle pattern prints.
363
6. Do one of the following, depending on the results of the product check:
• If the page prints and the nozzle check pattern is complete, the product is operating properly. Any
operation problem you may have could be caused by your computer, cable, software, or selected
settings. Check the other solutions in this book or try uninstalling and reinstalling your printer
software.
• If the page prints but the nozzle check pattern has gaps, clean the print head.
• If the page does not print, the product may have a problem. Check the other solutions in this
manual. If they do not work, contact Epson.
Related references
Nothing Prints
Resetting Control Panel Defaults

If you have a problem with settings on the product control panel, you can reset them to their factory
defaults. You can choose which settings to reset or reset them all.

2. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Restore Default Settings.
Note: You may need to enter the administrator password.
364
3. Select one of these options:

• Network Settings: Resets all network settings
• Copy Settings: Resets all settings for copying
• Scan Settings: Resets all settings for scanning
• Fax Settings: Resets all settings for faxing
• Clear All Data and Settings: Resets all control panel settings including the contacts list
You see a confirmation screen.
4. Select Yes to reset the selected settings. (Select No if you want to cancel the operation.)
Solving Setup Problems

Check these sections if you have problems while setting up your product.
Product Does Not Turn On or Off
Noise After Ink Installation
Software Installation Problems
365
Product Does Not Turn On or Off

If you cannot turn the product on or off, try these solutions:
• If you cannot turn on your product, make sure the power cord is securely connected and hold down
the power button a little longer.
• If you cannot turn off your product, hold down the power button a little longer. If you still cannot turn off
your product, unplug the power cord, plug the power cord back in, then turn your product on and off
again using the power button.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Noise After Ink Installation

If you hear noises from your product after installing ink, check the following:
• The first time you install the ink packs, the product must charge its print head. Wait until charging
finishes before you turn off the product, or it may charge improperly and use excess ink the next time
you turn it on.
• If the product's print head stops moving or making noise, and the charging process has not finished
after approximately 5 minutes, turn off your product. Turn it back on and check to see if charging is still
in progress. If it is still in progress, contact Epson for help.

If you have problems while installing your product software, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any necessary cables are securely connected at both ends. If
you still have problems installing software, disconnect the cable and carefully follow the instructions on
the Start Here sheet. Also make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system.
• Close any other programs, including screen savers and virus protection software, and install your
product software again.
• In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the correct port is shown in
the printer properties.
• For Mac, make sure your product is shown in the printer list. Click System Preferences or System
Settings > Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax. If the printer name is not displayed, add the printer.
• If you see any error message or your software does not install correctly in Windows, you may not have
software installation privileges. Contact your system administrator.
366
• If you are printing over a network, make sure your product is set up properly on the network.
• If the USB cable is not recognized, try using a different USB cable.
Related concepts

If the IC card reader cannot read the authentication card, try these solutions:
• Make sure the card reader is securely connected to the external USB port on the back of the product.
• Make sure both the card reader and the authentication card are supported.
Related tasks
Solving Network Problems

Check these solutions if you have problems setting up or using your product on a network.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is
not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.

Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac
USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window
367
If your product has trouble finding or connecting to a wireless router or access point, try these solutions:
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit or does not appear, make sure you select one of the WPS options from
the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• Make sure to place your product within contact range of your router or access point. Avoid placing
your product near a microwave oven, cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
Note for Latin America: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual
band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home
Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet
service provider for instructions.
• Verify that your router or access point is operating correctly by connecting to it from your computer or
another device.
• Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine
the cause of the problem.
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
• Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router.
• Check to see if access restrictions, such as MAC address filtering, are set on the router or access
point. If access restrictions are set, add your product's MAC address to your router's address list. To
obtain your product's MAC address, print a network status sheet. Then follow the instructions in your
router or access point documentation to add the address to the list.
• If your router or access point does not broadcast its network name (SSID), follow the instructions that
came with your product to enter your wireless network name manually.
• If your router or access point has security enabled, determine the kind of security it is using and any
required password or passphrase for connection. Then make sure to enter the exact WEP key or WPA
passphrase correctly.
• Check if your computer is restricting the available wireless channels. If so, verify that your wireless
access point is using one of the usable channels and change to a usable channel, if necessary.
368
• If the IP address assigned to the product is 169.254.XXX.XXX and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0,
the IP address may not be assigned correctly. Check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to
the product. Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the product.
• If you cannot connect your product to a device using Wi-Fi Direct, you may have exceeded the
maximum number of devices connected to your product (8). Print a network status sheet or access
Web Config on the browser for your device and check the number of connected devices. If 8 devices
are already connected, disconnect a device by deleting the product's SSID from the Wi-Fi screen of
that device. If fewer than 8 devices are connected, check the accuracy of your other network settings,
move your device closer to your product, and try connecting again.
• If you are using a Wi-Fi Direct connection that suddenly disconnects, the Wi-Fi Direct password on
your device may have been changed. If necessary, delete the existing DIRECT-xxxxxxxx connection
settings from your device and enter a new password. See your device documentation for instructions.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
Related tasks

If EpsonNet Setup cannot find your product on a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your network. Verify the connection using your
• Check if your network name (SSID) contains non-ASCII characters. Your product cannot display non-
ASCII characters.
• Make sure your product is not connected to a guest network.
• If necessary, reinstall your product software and try running EpsonNet Setup again:
1. Reset your product's network settings to their factory defaults.
2. Windows only: Uninstall your product software.
3. Restart your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
369
restart your router, so note the next step before restarting it.
4. Download your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here
sheet.
• If you have replaced your router, reinstall your product software to connect to the new router.
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing detection of your device over the network. See your router or access point documentation
for instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
Related concepts
Related tasks
Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac

If you connected a device to a USB 3.0 port on your Mac, you may experience wireless network
interference between your product and your Mac.
If you cannot connect to your product over the wireless network or the connection becomes unstable,
move the device connected to your Mac USB 3.0 port further away from your Mac.
USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable

If you receive a communication error or experience an unstable connection when using a SuperSpeed
USB port on your computer with a USB 2.0 cable, try these solutions:
• Use a USB 3.0 cable.
• Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on your computer, if available.
370
• Connect to another SuperSpeed USB port on your computer, if available.
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window

If your product does not appear in the Mac printer window, try these solutions:
• Turn your product off, wait 30 seconds, then turn it back on again.
• If you are connecting the product wirelessly via EpsonNet Setup and you do not see the Wi-Fi antenna
icon with connection bars on your LCD screen, make sure your product software was installed
correctly. If necessary, reinstall your software.

If you cannot print over a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure that your product is turned on.
• Make sure you install your product's network software as described in your product documentation.
• Print a network status sheet and verify that the network settings are correct. If the network status is
Disconnected, check any cable connections and turn your product off and then on again.
• If you are using TCP/IP, make sure the product's IP address is set correctly for your network. If your
network does not assign IP addresses using DHCP, set the IP address manually. If the IP address
assigned to the printer is 169.254.xxx.xxx and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP address may not
be assigned correctly. Restart your wireless router or reset the printer's network settings.
• Make sure your computer and product are both using the same wireless network.
• If network printing is slow, print a network status sheet and check the signal strength. If it is poor, place
your product closer to your router or access point. Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven,
cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
371
• Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
restart your router.
• Check if there are any paused print jobs.

• Make sure your printer is selected as the default printer.
• Check if the selected printer port is correct.
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing printing from a device over the network. See your router or access point documentation for
instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control
panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• Check your wired LAN router or access point to see if the LED for the port to which your product is
connected is on or flashing. If the link LED is off, try the following:
• Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your product and to your router, access
point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting your product to a different port or a different router, access point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting with a different Ethernet cable.
• Try printing to your product from another computer on the network.
• If you are connecting the product via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi-Fi icon does not appear lit on the
LCD screen, make sure your product software was installed correctly. If necessary, reinstall your
software.
Related concepts
Related tasks
372
If you have problems scanning over a network, try these solutions:
• If you cannot scan from your product control panel, make sure you restarted your computer after
installing the product software. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your
firewall or security software.
• If you are scanning a large original at a high resolution, a network communication error may occur. Try
scanning again at a lower resolution.
• If network communication was interrupted while starting Epson Scan 2, exit Epson Scan 2, wait a few
seconds, and restart it. If Epson Scan 2 cannot restart, turn off your product, turn it back on, and try
restarting Epson Scan 2 again.
• Check the scanner setting and reset the connection if necessary using Epson Scan 2 Utility:
Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Scan 2 Utility and select it. Make sure your product is
selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is
Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen, select EPSON, and select Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows (other versions): Click or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson
Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other
tab and click Reset.
Mac: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
373
Related concepts
Solving Network Security Problems

Check these sections if you have problems using the network security features.

If you cannot create the secure IPP printing port, try these solutions:
• Make sure you specified the correct server certificate for SSL/TLS communication using Web Config.
• If you are using a CA certificate, make sure it is imported to the computer that is accessing the
product.
Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems
Related tasks
Related topics

If you cannot update a self-signed certificate or create a CSR for a CA-signed certificate, try these
solutions:
• Make sure that you entered a Common Name setting in Web Config.
• Make sure the Common Name setting does not contain unsupported characters or is divided by a
comma. Correct the setting and update the certificate again.
Related references
CSR Setup Settings
374
CSR Import Settings
Related tasks

If you cannot import a digital certificate, try these solutions:
• Make sure the CA-signed certificate and the CSR have the same information. If they do not match,
import the certificate to a device that matches the information or use the CSR to obtain the CA-signed
certificate again.
• Make sure the CA-signed certificate file size is 5KB or less.
• Make sure you are entering the correct password.
Related references
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Related tasks

If you accidentally deleted a CA-signed certificate, try these solutions:
• If you retained a backup file, import the CA-signed certificate again.
• If you obtained the certificate using a CSR created in Web Config, you cannot import a deleted
certificate. Create a new CSR and obtain a new certificate.
Related references
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Related tasks

If you see a warning message when using a digital certificate, check for solutions in this table.
375
Message Solution
Enter a Server Certificate. Select a certificate file and click Import.
CA Certificate 1 is not entered. Import CA certificate 1 before importing additional
certificates.
Invalid value below. Remove any unsupported characters in the file
path and password.
Invalid date and time. Set the date and time on the product using Web
Config, EpsonNet Config, or the product control
panel.
Invalid password Enter the password that matches the password set
for the CA certificate.
Invalid file Try the following:
• Import only certificate files in X509 format sent
by a trusted certificate authority.
• Make sure the file size is 5KB or less and is not
corrupted or fabricated.
• Make sure the chain in the certificate is valid;
check the certificate authority's website.
Cannot use the Server Certificates that include Import certificate files in PKCS#12 format that
more than three CA certificates. contains one or two CA certificates, or convert
each certificate to PRM format and import them
again.
The certificate has expired. Check if the certificate Make sure the product time and date are set
is valid, or check the date and time on your printer. correctly and, if the certificate is out of date, obtain
and import a new certificate.
376
Message Solution
Private key is required. Do one of the following to pair a private key with
the certificate:
• For PEM/DER format certificates obtained from
a CSR using a computer, specify the private key
file.
• For PKCS#12 format certificates obtained from
a CSR using a computer, create a file containing
the private key.
If you re-imported a PEM/DER format certificate
obtained from a CSR using Web Config, you can
only import it once. You must obtain and import a
new certificate.
Setup failed. Make sure the computer and product are
connected, and the certificate file is not corrupted,
then import the certificate file again.

Related tasks
Solving Copying Problems

Check these solutions if you have problems copying with your product.
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While

If your product makes a noise, but nothing copies, try these solutions:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
377
• If the nozzle check page does not print, but the product's power is on, make sure your product
software is installed correctly.
• Make sure your product is level (not tilted).
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Related concepts
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While

Your product is performing routine maintenance. This is normal.
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Solving Copy Quality Problems

Check these sections if your copies have a quality problem.

If your copies have incorrect, uneven, smeared, or faint colors, try these solutions:
• Run a print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Do not press too hard on the original when you copy from the scanner glass.
• Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not recommended.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass.
• Make sure your paper is not curled.

• When copying on thick paper, select a Thick Paper setting from the control panel (Settings >
General Settings > Printer Settings > Thick Paper). When this setting is enabled, copy quality may
decline and copy speed may decrease.
378
• If the back of the original appears in your printout, place a piece of black paper on the back of the
original and copy it again. You can also try lowering the Density setting.
Parent topic: Solving Copy Quality Problems
Related concepts
Related tasks

If the position, size, or margins of your copies are incorrect, try these solutions:
• When placing originals in the ADF, make sure the edge guides are against the edges of the paper.
• When placing originals on the scanner glass, make sure the original is placed correctly for scanning.
Align the corner of the original with the corner indicated by the symbol on the scanner glass. If
necessary, move the original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly.
• If the original is folded or wrinkled, use the scanner glass. Flatten any folds or wrinkles in the original
and try using another sheet or card to keep the original in contact with the scanner glass.
• Clean the scanner glass and ADF.
• Make sure the paper is loaded in the correct direction.
• Select the appropriate copy size and paper size settings on the LCD screen.
Parent topic: Solving Copy Quality Problems
Related tasks
Solving Paper Problems

Check these sections if you have problems using paper with your product.
379
Paper Jams Inside the Product

If you have problems feeding paper, try these solutions:
• If paper does not feed for printing, remove it from the paper tray or cassette. Reload it, then adjust the
edge guides. Make sure the paper stack is not above the tab on the edge guides inside the cassette or
paper tray.
• Be sure to insert the paper cassette all the way into your product.
• If multiple pages feed at once, remove the paper, fan the edges to separate the sheets, and reload it.
• Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets. For plain paper, do not load paper above
the arrow mark on the edge guides.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
• If paper jams when you print on both sides of the paper, try loading fewer sheets.
• Run the paper guide cleaning utility to clean the paper roller.
• If you installed an optional paper cassette unit, be sure to enable the cassette unit in the printing
software.
• For best results, follow these guidelines:
• Use new, smooth, high-quality paper that is not curled, creased, old, too thin, or too thick.
• Load paper in the cassette printable side down.
• Load paper in the paper tray printable side up.
• Do not load binder paper with holes in the cassette.
• Follow any special loading instructions that came with the paper.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Related tasks
380

If your originals do not feed when placed in the ADF, try these solutions:
• Make sure the ADF icon lights up on the Copy, Fax, or Scan screen on the LCD screen. If not, reload
the originals.
• Make sure the size, weight, and number of your originals are supported by the ADF.
• Make sure the originals are loaded correctly.
• Slide the edge guides against the edges of the originals.
• Make sure the document is not curled or creased.
• Try cleaning the inside of the ADF.
• Do not load originals above the arrow mark on the ADF edge guide.
381
Related references
Related tasks
Paper Jams Inside the Product

If you see a message that paper has jammed in the product, follow the on-screen instructions to locate
and remove the jammed paper.
Take the following precautions when removing jammed paper from the product:
• Remove the jammed paper carefully. Using too much force may damage the product.
• Unless specifically instructed, avoid tilting the product, placing it on its side, or turning it upside down,
as ink may spill.
Warning: Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the product. If the
product starts operating, it may cause an injury. Do not touch any protruding parts inside the product.

If you have problems with paper ejecting properly, try these solutions:
• If paper does not eject fully, you may have set the wrong paper size. Cancel printing to eject the paper.
Select the correct paper size when you reprint.
• If paper is wrinkled when it ejects, it may be damp or too thin. Load new paper and be sure to select
the correct paper type setting when you reprint.
• Clean the roller inside the printer to remove any dust on the paper path.
Related tasks
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer

Check these sections if you have problems while printing from your computer.
382
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this
manual. See the Apple website for details.
Note: For problems while printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer
software, see the sections covering that software in this manual.
Nothing Prints
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar
Printing is Slow
Nothing Prints
If you have sent a print job and nothing prints, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your computer.
• Make sure any interface cables are connected securely at both ends.
• Make sure the interface specifications match the specifications for the printer and the computer.
• Make sure there are no errors or paper jams in the product.
• If you connected your product to a USB hub, make sure it is a first-tier hub. If it still does not print,
connect your product directly to your computer instead of the hub.
• If your computer is connected using a USB cable, try a different USB port on your computer or a
different cable.
• Make sure the printer status is not offline or pending.
• Run a product check to see if a test page prints. If the test page prints, check to see if your product
software is installed correctly.
• Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a high-
resolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. Print the image at a lower
resolution or if necessary, increase your system's memory.
• In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the printer port setting
matches the printer connection port.
• In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in
the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs.
383
• In Windows, do one of the following to open the Epson Printer Connection Checker and follow the on-
screen instructions to check the connection status:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Printer Connection Checker and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select the Epson Printer Connection Checker
icon.
• Windows 7: Click and select All Programs > Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection
Checker.
• On a Mac, make sure the printer is added to the printer list and the printer is not paused.
• If you are using the PostScript printing software, make sure the printing language setting on the
control panel is set to Auto or PS.
• Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program.
• In Windows, the product may not print if a large number of print jobs are sent. Try selecting Print
directly to the printer on the Advanced tab in the printer properties.
• You can try to clear the problem by updating the product software to the latest version. If the problem
persists, try uninstalling and reinstalling the printer driver.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Related references
Interface Specifications
Windows System Requirements
Mac System Requirements
Related tasks
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar

If you do not see your product icon in the Windows taskbar, first try restarting your computer. If that does
not work, try this solution:
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printing preferences.
384
product name and select Manage > Printing preferences.
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name, select Printing Preferences, and select
your product name again if necessary.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name, select
Printing Preferences, and select your product name again if necessary.
• Windows Vista: Click , select Control Panel, and click Printer under Hardware and Sound.
Right-click your product name, select Printing Preferences, and select your product name again if
necessary.
3. Click the Extended Settings button.
4. Select Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3 and click OK.
5. Click the Monitoring Preferences button.
6. Click the checkbox for the option that adds the shortcut icon to the taskbar.
7. Click OK to close the open program windows.
Printing is Slow
If printing becomes slow, try these solutions:
• Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a high-
resolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. If necessary, increase your
system's memory.
• If you are using Windows 7, close the Devices and Printers window before you print.
• Make sure Quiet Mode is turned off.
• Clear space on your hard drive or run a defragmentation utility to free up existing space.
• Close any programs you are not using when you print.
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
• If printing becomes slower after printing continuously for a long time, the product may have
automatically slowed down to protect the print mechanism from overheating or becoming damaged.
Let the product rest with the power on for 30 minutes, then try printing again.
385
• If you are printing over a wireless network, factors such as interference, network traffic, or weak signal
strength may affect your printing speed.
• If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, try selecting Fast as the Print Quality
setting on the Advanced tab of the printer software.
For the fastest printing, select the following settings in your product software:
• Turn on any high speed settings in your product software.
• Select a lower print quality setting.
• Make sure the ink drying time has not been increased for double-sided printing.
• Windows: Click the Maintenance or Utility tab, select Extended Settings or Speed and Progress,
and select the following settings:
• Always Spool RAW Datatype
• Page Rendering Mode
• Print as Bitmap
• Windows: Select Printing preferences, click the More Options tab, and make sure the
Bidirectional printing setting is enabled.
• Mac: Select System Preferences or System Settings, select Printers & Scanners, and select your
product. Select Options & Supplies, select Options (or Driver), and enable the Bidirectional
printing setting.
• Enable the bidirectional setting on the product control panel (Settings > General Settings > Printer
Settings > Bidirectional).
If printing is still slow and you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista, try the following:
1. Click and select Computer or My Computer. Double-click the C: drive and open these folders:
ProgramData > EPSON > PRINTER.
Note: If you do not see the ProgramData folder, open the Organize menu and select Folder and
search options. In the window that appears, click the View tab, select Show hidden files, folders,
and drives in the Advanced settings list, and click OK.
386
2. Right-click the EPAUDF01.AUD file and select Delete.
3. Restart your computer and try printing again.
Related references
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems

Check these sections if you have problems with the layout or content of your printed pages.
Inverted Image
Too Many Copies Print
Blank Pages Print
Slanted Printout
Inverted Image
If your printed image is inverted unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Turn off any mirror or inversion settings in your printing application.
• Turn off the Mirror Image, Flip horizontally, or Reverse page orientation settings in your printer
software. (This option has different names, depending on your operating system version.)
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
387
Too Many Copies Print
Make sure that the Copies setting in your printing program or printer software is not set for multiple
copies.
Blank Pages Print

If blank pages print unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software.
• If a blank page exists in a document you are printing and you want to skip printing it, select the Skip
Blank Page setting in your printer software, if available.
• Run a print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program.
• Make sure your product is on a flat surface and operating in the recommended environmental
conditions or multiple sheets of paper may be fed at the same time.
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Related references
Environmental Specifications
Related tasks

If your printed page has incorrect margins, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software.
• Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program.
• Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the product.
388
• When placing originals on the scanner glass, align the corner of the original with the corner indicated
by the arrow. If the edges of the copy are cropped, move the original slightly away from the corner.
• Clean the scanner glass and the document cover. If there is dust or stains on the glass, the copy area
may extend to include the dust or stains.
• Load paper in the correct direction and slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Select the appropriate original size in the copy settings.
You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print.
Related tasks

If incorrect characters appear in your prints, try these solutions before reprinting:
• Make sure any cables are securely connected at both ends.
• In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in
the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs.
• On a Mac, cancel any paused print jobs.
• If incorrect characters still appear in your prints, try connecting your product using a different cable.
• If your computer entered sleep mode the last time you printed, the next print job after your computer
exits sleep mode may contain garbled characters. Print your document again.
• If you are using the PostScript printer software, EPS files created in binary format may not print
correctly. Try creating the file in ASCII format instead.
• If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, the product cannot print binary data if it is
connected to the computer using a USB cable. Try selecting ASCII or TBCP as the Output Protocol
setting on the Device Settings tab in the printer properties.
• If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, select the appropriate substitution fonts on
the Device Settings tab in the printer properties.
389
Related tasks

If your printed image is the wrong size or in the wrong position, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size and layout settings in your printing program and printer
software.
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size on the control panel.
• Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the printer.
• If the edges of a copy are cropped, slightly move the original away from the edges of the scanner
glass.
• Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program.
• Be sure to select the appropriate original size setting for your original in the copy settings.
You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print.
Related references
Copying Options
Related tasks
Slanted Printout
If your printouts are slanted, try these solutions:
• Make sure the paper is loaded in the correct direction.
• Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
390
• Select a higher print quality setting in your printer software.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Align the print head.
• Adjust the print quality.
• If aligning the print head did not improve the quality, disable the Bidirectional Printing setting.
• Make sure the product is not printing while tilted or at an angle.
Related references
Related tasks
Solving Print Quality Problems

Check these sections if your printouts have problems with print quality, but your image looks fine on your
computer screen.

Grainy Printout
Incorrect Colors
391
If you notice white or dark lines in your prints (also called banding), try these solutions before you reprint:
necessary.
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• Align the print head. If print quality does not improve after aligning the print head, disable the
bidirectional (high speed) setting.
• If you are copying from the ADF, copy from the scanner glass instead or use a higher quality setting.
• When vertical banding appears or the paper is smeared, clean the paper path.
• You may need to replace an ink pack.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Related references
Related tasks

If your printouts are blurry or smeared, try these solutions:
• Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
• Slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.
• Use a support sheet with special paper, or load special paper one sheet at a time.
392
• Use Epson papers to ensure proper saturation and absorption of genuine Epson inks.
• Make sure the paper type setting in your product software matches the type of paper you loaded.
• If you are printing on thick paper or envelopes, turn on the Thick Paper setting from the control panel
or select Thick Paper and Envelopes in the Extended Settings of the printer software. (Turning this
setting on will decrease print speed.)
• When manually printing 2-sided, make sure the ink is completely dry before loading the paper.
• Remove each sheet from the output tray as it is printed.
• Avoid handling printouts on glossy paper right after printing to allow the ink to set.
• When vertical banding appears or the paper is smeared, clean the paper path.
• If you print on both sides of a sheet of paper, smudges may appear on the reverse side of heavily
saturated or dark images. If one side of a sheet will contain a lighter image or text, print that side first.
Adjust the density and/or ink drying time settings.
• Lower the copy density setting on the product control panel.
necessary.
• Align the print head using the Print Quality Adjustment setting.
• Clean the paper path.
• Do not press too hard on the original or the document cover when you are scanning originals on the
scanner glass.
• Clean the scanner glass.
• Clean the ADF.
Note: Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place it on a flat, stable surface that
extends beyond the base of the product in all directions.
393
Related references
Related tasks

If your printouts are faint or have gaps, try these solutions:
necessary.
• The ink packs may be old or low on ink, and you may need to replace them.
• Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
• When copying, increase the Density setting on the product control panel.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• Clean the paper path.
Related concepts
Related tasks
394
Grainy Printout
If your printouts are grainy, try these solutions:
• Select a higher print quality setting and turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
necessary.
• Align the print head using the Print Quality Adjustment setting.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• You may need to increase the image resolution or print a smaller size; see your software
documentation.
Note: Images from the Internet may be low resolution and not result in a high quality printout.
• If you enlarged the image size in an image-editing program, you need to increase the image resolution
setting to retain a high image quality. Increase the image resolution by the same amount you increase
the image size. For example, if the image resolution is 300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the
image size for printing, change the resolution setting to 600 dpi.
Note: Higher resolution settings result in larger file sizes, which take longer to process and print.
Consider the limitations of your computer system when selecting a resolution, and select the lowest
possible resolution that produces acceptable quality to keep file sizes manageable.

Related concepts
Related tasks
395
Incorrect Colors
If your printouts have incorrect colors, try these solutions:
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper you loaded.
• Make sure the Grayscale setting is not selected in your printer software.
necessary.
• After you print, the colors in your printout need time to set as the ink dries. During this time, the colors
may look different than you expect. To speed up drying time, do not stack your printouts on top of each
other.
• Your printed colors can never exactly match your on-screen colors. However, you can use a color
management system to get as close as possible. Try using the color management options in your
printer software.
• Try turning off the PhotoEnhance setting in Windows.
• Select Custom as the Color Correction setting on the More Options tab of the printer software, then
click Advanced. Try changing the Scene Correction setting to something other than Automatic. If
changing that setting does not work, change the Color Management setting to any color correction
method other than PhotoEnhance.
• If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, try adjusting the Color Mode setting on the
Advanced tab of the printer software.
• For best results, use genuine Epson paper.
• Remove any dust or dirt on the originals and clean the scanner glass.
• Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
• On the product control panel, change the Fix Photo setting from Auto to another option, or select
Enhance Off.
• If you are copying an original, lower the Density setting.
Related references
Related tasks
396
Solving Scanning Problems

Check these solutions if you have problems scanning with your product.
Note: For solutions when using the Epson ScanSmart software, see the Epson ScanSmart help utility.
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly

Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly

If your scanning software does not operate correctly, try these solutions:
• Make sure your computer has adequate memory and meets the system requirements for your
operating system.
• Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart your scanning software.
• If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall your scanning software, try reinstalling it.
• In Windows, make sure your product is listed as a valid device in the Scanners and Cameras control
panel.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems

If you cannot start Epson Scan 2, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any interface cables are securely connected at both ends.
• Make sure Epson Scan 2 is selected as your scanning program.
• Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart Epson Scan 2.
• Check the connection setting and test the connection using Epson Scan 2 Utility:
397
Windows 11: Click , search for Epson Scan 2 Utility and select it. Make sure the correct product
is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is
Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct
product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows (other versions): Click or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan
2 > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other
tab and click Reset.
Mac: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
• Make sure you do not have multiple versions of Epson Scan 2 installed. If you do, uninstall both
versions and install one version.
• If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall Epson Scan 2, try reinstalling it.
• If the user restriction feature (Access Control) is enabled, a user ID and password are required to
scan. If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems
Related tasks
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems

Check these sections if a scanned image on your computer screen has a quality problem.
Note: For solutions when using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac)
software, see the Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) help utility.

Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
398

If your scanned image consists only of a few dots, try these solutions:
• Make sure you placed your original for scanning facing the correct way.
• Remove any lint or dirt from your original.
• Do not press on the original or the document cover with too much force.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related tasks

If a line of dots appears in all your scanned images, try these solutions:
• Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass.
• Make sure any interface cables are securely connected at both ends.
• Remove any dust or dirt that may have adhered to your original.
• Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
If you are scanning from the ADF, make sure the ADF edge guides fit against the loaded originals. You
can also try cleaning the ADF and scanning again.
Related tasks
399
If straight lines in an original appear crooked in a scanned image, make sure to place your original
straight when you scan it.
Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
If you are scanning from the ADF, make sure the ADF edge guides fit against the loaded originals. You
can also try cleaning the ADF and scanning again.
Related tasks
Related topics

If you encounter quality problems with your scanned image, try these solutions:
Image is Distorted or Blurry

• Do not move your original or your product during scanning.
• Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place your product on a flat, stable
surface that extends beyond its base in all directions.
• Adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Make sure you select the correct Image Type for your original.
• Increase the Resolution setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White, adjust the Threshold setting. (The Image Option must
be set to None or Color Enhance.)
• If the Image Type setting is Color or Grayscale, select the Unsharp Mask setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White, select Text Enhancement. If the Image Type setting is
Color or Grayscale, change the Text Enhancement setting to High.
Image is Too Dark

400
• If the Image Type is set to Color or Grayscale, adjust the Brightness setting.
• Check the brightness and contrast settings of your computer monitor.
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image

• Place a piece of black paper on the back of the original and scan it again.
• Lower the copy density setting.
• Adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Select the Advanced Settings tab and adjust the Brightness setting.
• If the Image Type is set to Black & White, select Text Enhancement. If the Image Type is set to
Color or Grayscale, change the Text Enhancement setting to High.
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors

Printed colors can never exactly match the colors on your computer monitor because printers and
monitors use different color systems: monitors use RGB (red, green, and blue) and printers typically use
CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black).
Check the color matching and color management capabilities of your computer, display adapter, and the
software you are using to see if they are affecting the palette of colors you see on your screen.
Remove any dust or dirt from your originals and clean the scanner glass. Do not press with too much
force on the original or document cover.
To adjust the colors in your scanned image, adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try
scanning again:
• If the Image Type setting is Auto, Color or Grayscale, adjust the Contrast setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White or Grayscale, adjust the Color Enhance setting.
Related references
Related tasks
Related topics
401
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
If you are scanning a thick or warped original, cover its edges with paper to block external light as you
scan it.

You may see a ripple pattern (called a moiré) in scanned images of printed documents. This is caused
by interference from differing pitches in the scanner's screen and your original's halftone screen. To
reduce this effect, adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Select the Descreening setting on the Advanced Settings tab.
• Select a lower Resolution setting.
• Place the original at a slightly different angle.
Related references

If the edges of a scanned image are cropped, make sure your original is placed correctly for scanning. If
necessary, move your original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly.
In the Epson Scan 2 settings, set the Edge Fill setting to None.
Related references
Related topics
Solving Faxing Problems

Check these solutions if you have problems faxing with your product.
402
Fax Quality is Poor

If you cannot send or receive faxes, try these solutions:
• If an error code is displayed on the control panel, try the solutions suggested in the error code list.
• Use Check Fax Connection on the control panel (Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings >
Check Fax Connection) to run the automatic fax connection check. Try the solutions suggested in
the report.
• If you are faxing from a computer, use the Epson FAX Utility to send your fax.
• Make sure the recipient's fax machine is turned on and working.
• Make sure the recipient's fax number is correct and entered correctly.
• Make sure paper is loaded correctly in your product.
• Make sure you have set up your header information and have not blocked your caller ID. Otherwise,
your faxes might be rejected by the recipient's fax machine.
• Make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto so you can receive faxes automatically.
• Check that the cable connecting your telephone wall jack to your product's LINE port is secure.
• Print a fax connection report using your product control panel or fax software to help diagnose the
problem.
• Verify that the telephone wall jack works by connecting a phone to it and testing it.
• Check the Line Type setting and set it to PBX. If your phone system requires an external access code
to reach an outside line, register the code to the product and add a # (hash) to the beginning of the
phone number when dialing.
• If you connected your product to a DSL phone line, you must connect a DSL filter to the phone jack to
enable faxing over the line. Contact your DSL provider for the necessary filter.
• If you are connected to a DSL phone line, connect the product directly to a telephone wall jack and
send a fax. If it works, the problem may be caused by the DSL filter. Contact your DSL provider.
• If your telephone line has static, turn off your product's error correction mode fax communication
setting and try faxing again.
403
• Make sure you installed the FAX driver for your product and that it is not paused.
• The data being sent may be too large. Try faxing the originals in batches, by using a connected phone,
or by selecting On Hook. If you are faxing in monochrome, enable the Direct Send setting (Fax > Fax
Settings > Fax Send Settings).
• Try lowering your product's fax speed setting.
• If a communication error occurs, change the Fax Speed setting to Slow(9,600bps) on the control
panel.
• Make sure the error correction mode (ECM) setting is turned on if you are trying to send or receive a
color fax.
• If your telephone line uses call waiting and you have trouble receiving faxes, turn off call waiting to
prevent disruption of incoming faxes.
• If you have subscribed to a call forwarding service, the product may not be able to receive faxes.
Contact your service provider for assistance.
• If the recipient fax machine does not answer your call within 50 seconds after the product has finished
dialing, add pauses after the fax number to send the fax.
• Check your inbox and delete faxes after reading or printing them. If the inbox is full, the product cannot
receive faxes.
• When sending faxes using the subaddress feature, ask the recipient if their fax machine can receive
faxes using this feature. Check that the subaddress and password are correct, and that they match
with the recipient subaddress and password. Check this when receiving faxes as well.
• Check if the sender's fax number is registered to the Rejection Number List
• If you enabled Rejection Fax options, check if the sender is blocked, did not set up header
information, or is not registered in your contacts list, as necessary.
• If you cannot send faxes at a specified time, make sure the date and time are set correctly on the
product.
• If you have not connected a telephone to the printer, set the Receive Mode setting to Auto on the
control panel.
• If you are receiving faxes using the Epson FAX Utility, check that your product is registered as a fax
product in your operating system:
Windows: Make sure the product appears in Devices and Printers, Printer, or Printers and Other
Hardware. If the product does not appear, uninstall and re-install the Epson FAX Utility.
404
Mac: Select System Preferences or System Settings > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan or
Print & Fax) and make sure your product appears. If your product does not appear, click + and add
your product. If the product does appear, double-click it and make sure it is not paused.
Note: Do not turn the product off while it is receiving a fax. Otherwise, the fax transmission will be lost.
Note: If your product is connected to a VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) phone line, keep in mind that
fax machines are designed to work over analog phone lines. Epson cannot guarantee that fax
transmission will work when using VoIP.
If your phone line includes voice mail answering services, calls or faxes may be inadvertently received
by your voice mail service.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems

Related references
Related tasks

If you cannot receive faxes when a telephone is connected to your product, try these solutions:
• Make sure your telephone is connected to your product's EXT port.
• Make sure the Receive Mode is set to Manual.
Note: When answering a call that is a fax, wait until the product's LCD screen displays a message that a
connection has been made before you hang up.
405
Related tasks

If you see an error message telling you that the product's fax memory is full, try these solutions:
• If you set the product to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, delete any faxes you
have already read.
Note: Your product can store up to 200 faxes before its inbox is full.
• If you set the product to save received faxes on a computer, turn on the selected computer. Once the
faxes are saved on the computer, they are deleted from the product's memory.
• If you set the product to save received faxes on a USB device, connect the selected USB device
containing the save fax folder to the product. Once the faxes are saved on the USB device, they are
deleted from the product's memory.
Note: Make sure the USB device has enough available memory and is not write protected.
• If the memory is full, try the following:

• Send a monochrome fax using the direct sending feature
• Send your fax using the on hook feature
• Send your faxes in smaller batches
• If the product cannot print a received fax due to a product error, such as a paper jam, the memory full
error may appear. Clear any product errors, then ask the sender to resend the fax.
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
406
Fax Quality is Poor
If you receive a poor quality fax, try these solutions:
• Try enabling the error correction mode (ECM) setting.
• Contact the fax sender and ask them to send the fax in a higher resolution.
• Try reprinting the received fax.
If the sent fax quality is poor, try these solutions:
• Clean the ADF.
• Try changing the resolution or density setting on the control panel.
• Do not press on the document cover or the original with too much force.
• Remove any dust or dirt from the originals.
• Try changing the original type setting on the control panel.
• If you are sending a monochrome fax to a single recipient, try sending the fax using the Direct Send
feature.
Note: If you send a high-resolution monochrome fax without using the Direct Send feature, the
product may automatically lower the resolution.
• Try enabling the error correction mode (ECM) setting.

• If the back of the original appears in your sent fax, place a piece of black paper on the back of the
original and fax it again.
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
407
If your recipient receives a fax in an incorrect size, try these solutions:
• Make sure the original is placed correctly against the alignment marks.
• If the edge of the scanned image is missing, move the original away from the edge of the scanner
glass.
• Clean any dust or dirt from the originals.
• If you are sending a fax using the scanner glass, make sure your original is placed correctly and that
the correct paper size is selected on the control panel.
• Clean the scanner glass and document cover.
Related topics

If a received fax is not printed, try these solutions:
• Make sure the product is free of errors. The product cannot print received faxes if an error has
occurred with the product, such as a paper jam.
• If the product has been set to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, received faxes
are not automatically printed. Check the Fax Output setting on the product control panel and change
it, if necessary.
• If the product has been set to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, received faxes
are not automatically printed. Check the Receive Settings options on the product control panel and
change them, if necessary.
Related references
Solving USB Device Problems

Check these solutions if you have problems using USB devices with your product.
408

If you cannot view or print photos or documents from a USB device connected to your product, try these
solutions:
• Make sure memory devices are enabled on the product.
• Make sure your device is compatible with the product.
• Make sure the files on your device are in the correct format.
Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems
Related references
Related tasks

If you cannot save files on a USB device connected to your product, try these solutions:
• To save faxes on a USB device, create a folder using the unconditional save/forward settings on the
• Make sure the device is not write-protected.
• Make sure the device has enough available space.
• Make sure memory devices are enabled on your product.
• Make sure the device is compatible with the product.
Related references
Related tasks
409
If you have problems transferring files to or from a USB device connected to your product, try these
solutions:
• Make sure your device is compatible with the product.
• Make sure the device is not write-protected.
• Make sure there is enough free space on the device.
• Make sure your product is securely connected to your computer.
• Make sure that the file sharing setting for your product is enabled.
Related references
Related tasks

If you have a problem that requires you to uninstall and re-install your software, follow the instructions for
your operating system.
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
Related references
Related tasks
410
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
You can uninstall and then re-install your product software to solve certain problems.
2. Disconnect any interface cables.
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Settings and select it. Select Apps or System > Apps &
features. Then select the program you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Apps or System > Apps & features. Then
select the program you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Programs > Programs
and Features. Select the uninstall option for your Epson product, then select Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
Select your product again, if necessary, then select OK, and click Yes to confirm the
uninstallation.
EPSON, select your product, then click EPSON Printer Software Uninstall.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
In the next window, select your product and click OK. Then follow any on-screen instructions.
4. Do one of the following to uninstall Epson Scan, then follow any on-screen instructions:
• Windows 11/Windows 10: Select Epson Scan and click Uninstall.
• Windows 8.x/Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select Epson Scan and click Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
411
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
In most cases, you do not need to uninstall your product software before re-installing it. However, you
can download the Uninstaller utility from the Epson support website to uninstall your product software as
described here.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
1. To download the Uninstaller utility, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or

latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
2. Click Downloads.
3. Select your operating system, click Utilities, locate the Uninstaller utility, and click Download.
4. Run the file you downloaded.
5. Double-click the Uninstaller icon.
6. In the Epson Uninstaller screen, select the checkbox for each software program you want to
uninstall.
7. Click Uninstall.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
9. Reinstall your product software.
Note: If you uninstall the printer driver and your product name remains in the Print & Fax, Print & Scan,
or Printers & Scanners window, select your product name and click the – (remove) icon to remove it.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

If you need to contact Epson for technical support services, use the following support options.
Internet Support
Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product for solutions to common problems. You
can download drivers and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with
your questions.
412
Speak to a Support Representative
Before you call Epson for support, please have the following information ready:
• Product name
• Product serial number (located on a label on the product)
• Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
• Computer configuration
• Description of the problem
Then call:
• U.S. and Canada (English): (800) 241-5786, 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday
• Canada (French): (905) 709-3839, 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday
Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice. Toll or long distance charges may
apply.
Purchase Supplies and Accessories

You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales), epson.ca (Canadian sales),
or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized
reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in
Canada.
413
Technical Specifications
These sections list the technical specifications for your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or
this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.

Printable Area Specifications
Scanning Specifications
Fax Specifications
Ink Pack Specifications
Dimension Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Network Interface Specifications
Safety and Approvals Specifications

To use your product and its software, your computer should use one of these Microsoft operating
systems:
• Windows 11
• Windows 10
• Windows 8.x
• Windows 7
• Windows Vista
• Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later
414
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at
epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America),
select your product, and select Downloads.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Related references
Nothing Prints
Printing is Slow

To use your product and its software, your Mac should use one of these operating systems:
• macOS 13.x
• macOS 12.x
• macOS 11.x
• macOS 10.15.x
• macOS 10.14.x
• macOS 10.13.x
• macOS 10.12.x
• OS X 10.11.x
• OS X 10.10.x
• OS X 10.9.x
Note: Mac OS may not support some applications and features; the UNIX File System (UFS) for Mac
OS is not supported.
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at
epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America),
select your product, and select Downloads.

Related references
Nothing Prints
Printing is Slow
415
Note: Since the quality of any particular brand or type of paper may be changed by the manufacturer at
any time, Epson cannot guarantee the quality of any non-Epson brand or type of paper. Always test a
sample of paper stock before purchasing large quantities or printing large jobs.
Single-sheets
Size A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])

A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm)
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
16:9 wide (4 × 7.1 inches [102 × 181 mm])
Paper types Plain paper
Note: Your product also supports compatible papers distributed by

Epson. See the link at the end of this topic for a list of compatible
Epson papers.
Weight Plain paper: 17 lb (64 g/m2) to 24 lb (90 g/m2)
Thick paper: 25 lb (91 g/m2) to 68 lb (256 g/m2)
Envelopes
Size No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
416
Paper types Plain bond paper
Weight 20 lb (75 g/m2) to 27 lb (100 g/m2)

Related references
Slanted Printout
Related tasks
Printable Area Specifications

Single sheets
1 Top/bottom/right/left: 0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum

2 Reduced print quality area/top: 1.85 inches (47 mm) minimum
3 Reduced print quality area/bottom: 1.77 inches (45 mm) minimum
417
Envelopes
1 Left/right: 0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum

2 Top/bottom: 0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum
3 Reduced print quality area/left: 0.71 inch (18 mm) minimum
4 Reduced print quality area/right: 1.85 inches (47 mm) minimum

ADF type Auto-duplex scanning
Paper size US letter, legal, or A4 size, A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]),
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm), Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches
[216 × 340 mm]), Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Paper type Plain paper, high-quality plain paper, or recycled paper
Paper weight 17 lb (64 g/m2) to 24 lb (95 g/m2)
Sheet feeding capacity Total thickness: 0.22 inch (5.5 mm)
Approximately 50 sheets
418
Related references
Related tasks
Scanning Specifications
Scanner type Flatbed, color
Photoelectric device CIS
Effective pixels 10200 × 14040 pixels at 1200 dpi
Document size Maximum: 8.5 × 11.7 inches (216 × 297 mm)
Scanner glass: US letter or A4
Scanning resolution 1200 dpi (main scan)
2400 dpi (sub scan)
Output resolution 50 to 9600 dpi in 1 dpi increments
Image data Color:
48 bits per pixel (16 bits per pixel per color) internal
24 bits per pixel (8 bits per pixel per color) external
Grayscale:
16 bits per pixel internal
8 bits per pixel external
Black and white:
16 bits per pixel internal
1 bit per pixel external
Light source LED
419
Fax Specifications
Fax type Black-and-white and color fax capability (ITU-T Super Group 3)
Supported lines Standard analog phone lines
PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone systems
Speed Up to 33.6 kbps
Resolution Monochrome
Standard: 203 pixels per inch × 98 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm ×
3.85 lines per mm)
Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 196 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm × 7.7
lines per mm)
Super Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm
× 15.4 lines per mm)
Ultra Fine: 406 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch (16 pixels per mm
× 15.4 lines per mm)
Color
200 × 200 dpi
Compression method Monochrome: MH/MR/MMR
Color: JPEG
Communication standards G3, Super G3
Sending paper size Scanner Glass: Letter, A4
ADF: Letter, A4, Legal
Transmission speed Approx. 3 seconds (transmitting a standard A4 ITU-T chart No. 1
with Standard MMR encryption at a speed of 33.6 kbps)
(Actual speed depends on the
document, recipient's device,
and phone line status)
Contacts Number of contacts: up to 200
Number of groups: up to 199
Page memory Up to 550 pages (when an ITU-T No. 1 chart is received in
monochrome draft mode)
420
Redial 2 times (with 1 minute interval); may differ depending on your
country or region
Interface RJ-11 Phone Line
RJ-11 Telephone set connection
Ink Pack Specifications

The included initial ink packs are designed for reliable printer setup and cannot be used as replacement
ink packs or resold. After setup, the remaining ink is available for printing. Yields are based on ISO
24711 in default mode, printing continuously. Yields vary due to print images, settings, and
temperatures. Printing infrequently or primarily with one color reduces yields. All ink packs must be
installed with ink for printing and printer maintenance. For print quality, some ink remains in replaced ink
packs.
Color Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black

Ink pack life Opened package: 2 years
Unopened package: do not use if the date on the package has
expired
Temperature Storage: –22 to 104 °F (–30 to 40 °C)
1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Ink freezes at 18.6 °F (–7.45 °C) (depending on color; ink may
partially freeze at 32 °F (0 °C) or lower)
Ink thaws and is usable after 3 hours at 77 °F (25 °C)
421
Height Stored: 14.1 inches (357 mm)
Stored with 1 optional paper cassette installed: 18 inches (457 mm)
Stored with 2 optional paper cassettes installed: 21.9 inches (557
mm)
Stored with 3 optional paper cassettes installed: 25.9 inches (657
mm)
Printing: 17.7 inches (449 mm)
Printing with one optional paper cassette installed: 21.6 inches (549
mm)
Printing with two optional paper cassettes installed: 25.6 inches (649
mm)
Printing with three optional paper cassettes installed: 29.5 inches
(749 mm)
Width Stored: 16.7 inches (425 mm)
Depth Stored: 21.1 inches (535 mm); with output tray installed
Weight 41.2 lb (18.7 kg)
(without ink packs or power cord) With one optional paper cassette installed: 51.1 lb (23.2 kg)
With two optional paper cassettes installed: 61.1 lb (27.7 kg)
With three optional paper cassettes installed: 71.0 lb (32.2 kg)

Related references
422
Power supply rating 100 to 240 V
Rated frequency range 50 to 60 Hz
Rated current 1.0 to 0.6 A
Power consumption WF-C5810:
Standalone copying: Approximately 25 W (ISO/IEC24712)
Ready mode: Approximately 11.7 W
Sleep mode: Approximately 1.2 W
Power off mode: Approximately 0.2 W
WF-C5890:
Standalone copying: Approximately 27 W (ISO/IEC24712)
Ready mode: Approximately 11.7 W
Sleep mode: Approximately 1.2 W
Power off mode: Approximately 0.2 W

Related references
Temperature Operating: 50 to 95 °F (10 to 35 °C)
Storage: –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C) before initial ink charging
5 to 104 °F (–15 to 40 °C) after initial ink charging
1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Humidity Operating: 20 to 80% RH
(without condensation) Storage: 5 to 85% RH
423
Related references
Blank Pages Print
Interface type Hi-Speed USB (Device Class for computers)
Hi-Speed USB (for external USB device)
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally connected devices. USB 3.0 cables are not
supported.

Related references
Nothing Prints

Do not use devices with the following requirements:
• Dedicated driver
• Security settings, such as password or encryption, etc.
USB memory device 2TB

Formatted in FAT, FAT32, or exFAT
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally connected devices.
You can use USB devices with your product containing files that meet these specifications.
File format JPEGs (*.JPG) with the Exif Version 2.31 standard taken by digital
cameras (DCF version 1.0 or 2.0* compliant)
TIFF 6.0-compliant uncompressed images: RGB full-color or binary
(not CCITT-encoded)
PDF version 1.7 compliant data
424
Image size 80 × 80 pixels to 10200 × 10200 pixels
File size Up to 2GB
Number of files JPEG: Up to 9990**
TIFF: Up to 999
PDF: Up to 999
* Files stored on digital cameras with built-in memory are not supported.
** If the number of files exceeds 999, the files are displayed in groups.
Related references
Related tasks
Network Interface Specifications

Wi-Fi (U.S. and Canada)
Standard IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n*1/ac/k/r/v

Security WPA2-PSK (AES); complies with WPA2 standards with support for
WPA/WPA2 Personal
WPA3-SAE (AES)
WPA2/WPA-3-Enterprise
WEP (64/128 bit)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct only supports WPA2-PSK (AES)

Frequency band IEEE 802.11b/g/n: 2.4 GHz
IEEE 802.11a/n/ac: 5 GHz
425
Channels 2.4 GHz: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13
5 GHz:
Wi-Fi:
• W52 (36/40/44/48)
• W53 (52/56/60/64)
• W56 (100/104/108/112/116/132/136/140/144)
• W58 (149/153/157/161/165)
Wi-Fi Direct:
• W52 (36/40/44/48)
• W58 (149/153/157/161/165)
Connection modes Infrastructure mode
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct Simple AP mode is available even if you connect

the product to an Ethernet network. Wi-Fi Direct is not supported on
IEEE 802.11b.
*1
: Only available for the HT20
Wi-Fi (Latin America)
Standard IEEE 802.11 b/g/n*1/k/r/v

Security WPA2-PSK (AES); complies with WPA2 standards with support for
WPA/WPA2 Personal
WPA3-SAE (AES)
WPA2/WPA-3-Enterprise
WEP (64/128 bit)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct only supports WPA2-PSK (AES)

Frequency band 2.4 GHz
Channels 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13
426
Coordination modes Infrastructure mode
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct Simple AP mode is available even if you connect

the product to an Ethernet network. Wi-Fi Direct is not supported on
IEEE 802.11b.
*1
: Only available for the HT20
Ethernet
Standard IEEE802.3i (10BASE-T)*

IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)*
IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet); the connected device
should be IEEE802.3az compliant
Communication mode Auto, 10Mbps Full duplex, 10Mbps Half duplex, 100Mbps Full
duplex, 100Mbps Half duplex
Connector RJ-45
* Use a category 5e or higher STP (Shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent risk of radio interference.
Security
IEEE802.1X; requires the connected device to comply with IEEE802.1X
IPsec/IP Filtering
SSL/TLS; either HTTPS Server/Client or IPPS
SMTPS (StartTLS, SSL/TLS)
SNMPv3
427
Safety and Approvals Specifications
United States Safety: UL60950-1
EMC: FCC part 15 Subpart B Class B
Canada Safety: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
EMC: CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B)
This equipment contains the following wireless module:

• Manufacturer: Seiko Epson Corporation
• Type: J26H005
This product conforms to Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Epson cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and
away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed
outdoors is subject to licensing.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment
and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102
of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated so that
the radiator is kept at least 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more away from a person's body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
428
Notices
Check these sections for important notices about your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or
this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Important Safety Instructions

FCC Compliance Statement
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver
Trademarks
Copyright Notice
Important Safety Instructions

Before using your Epson product, read and follow these safety instructions.
General Printer Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
Parent topic: Notices
General Printer Safety Instructions

• Be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the printer.
• Use only the type of power source indicated on the printer's label.
• Use only the power cord that comes with the printer. Use of another cord may cause fires or shock. Do
not use the cord with any other equipment.
• Make sure the AC power cord meets the relevant local safety standard.
• Place the printer near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.
• Avoid plugging the printer into an outlet on the same circuit as a photo copier or air control system that
regularly switches on and off, or on an outlet controlled by a wall switch or timer.
• Do not let the power cord become damaged or frayed.
429
• If you use an extension cord with the printer, make sure the total ampere rating of the devices plugged
into the extension cord does not exceed the cord's ampere rating. Also, make sure the total ampere
rating of all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet's ampere rating.
• Always turn off the printer using the power button, and wait until the power light stops flashing before
unplugging the printer or cutting off power to the electrical outlet.
• Place the printer on a flat, stable surface that extends beyond its base in all directions. It will not
operate properly if it is tilted or at an angle.
• Keep your product at least 8.7 inches (22 cm) away from cardiac pacemakers to prevent your
product's radio waves from affecting the operation of the pacemaker.
• Leave enough space above the printer to fully raise the printer cover.
• Leave enough space in front of the printer for the paper to be fully ejected.
• Avoid locations that are subject to rapid changes in heat or humidity, shocks or vibrations, or dust.
• Do not place the printer near a radiator or heating vent or in direct sunlight.
• Leave enough room around the printer for sufficient ventilation. Do not block or cover openings in the
case or insert objects through the slots.
• The power-supply cords should be placed to avoid abrasions, cuts, fraying, crimping, and kinking. Do
not place objects on top of the power-supply cords and do not allow the power-supply cords to be
stepped on or run over. Be particularly careful to keep all the power-supply cords straight at the ends.
• Keep the printer away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference, such as loudspeakers or
the base units of cordless telephones.
• When connecting the printer to a computer or other device with a cable, ensure the correct orientation
of the connectors. Each connector has only one correct orientation. Inserting a connector in the wrong
orientation may damage both devices connected by the cable.
• Do not insert objects through the slots on the printer.
• Do not put your hand inside the printer while it is printing.
• Do not trap your fingers when closing the scanner unit.
• Do not touch the flat white cable inside the printer.
• Do not move the print head by hand; this may damage the printer.
• Do not spill liquid on the printer and do not handle the printer with wet hands.
• Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the printer. Doing so may
cause fire.
• Except as specifically explained in your documentation, do not attempt to service the printer yourself.
430
• Unplug the printer and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: if
the power cord or plug is damaged; if liquid has entered the product; if the product has been dropped
or the case damaged; if the product does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in
performance. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions.
• If damage occurs to the plug, replace the cord set or consult a qualified electrician. If there are fuses in
the plug, make sure you replace them with fuses of the correct size and rating.
• Never disassemble, modify, or attempt to repair the power cord, plug, printer, or options by yourself,
except as specifically explained in the printer's manuals.
• Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet if you are not going to use the printer for an extended
period.
• Before transporting the printer, make sure that the print head is in the home (far right) position and the
ink packs are installed.
• When storing or transporting the printer, do not tilt it, stand it on its side, or turn it upside down;
otherwise, ink may leak.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions

Radio waves from this product may adversely affect the operation of medical equipment or automatically
controlled devices, such as pacemakers, automatic doors or fire alarms. When using this product near
such devices or inside a medical facility, follow the directions from authorized staff members at the
facility, and follow all posted warnings and directions on the device to avoid causing an accident.
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions

When using telephone equipment, you should always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock, and personal injury, including the following:
• Do not use the Epson product near water.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Caution: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
431
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
• Use only a dry, soft cloth to clean the LCD screen. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers.
• If the LCD screen is damaged, contact Epson. If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands, wash
them thoroughly with soap and water. If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems remain after a thorough flushing, see a doctor
immediately.
• Do not press too hard on the LCD screen or subject it to heavy impacts.
• Do not use a pointy or sharp object, such as a pen or your fingernail, to operate the LCD screen.
• If the LCD screen chips or cracks, do not touch or attempt to remove the broken pieces; contact Epson
for support.
• Do not subject your product to sudden changes in temperature or humidity; this may cause
condensation to develop inside the LCD screen and degrade its performance.
• The LCD screen may contain a few small bright or dark spots, and may display uneven brightness.
These are normal and do not indicate that the screen is damaged in any way.
FCC Compliance Statement

For United States Users
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
432
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC
Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits
established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded
equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do
not leave cables connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canadian Users

CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver

1. DISPUTES, BINDING INDIVIDUAL ARBITRATION, AND WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND
CLASS ARBITRATIONS
1.1 Disputes. The terms of this Section 1 shall apply to all Disputes between you and Epson. The term
"Dispute" is meant to have the broadest meaning permissible under law and includes any dispute, claim,
controversy or action between you and Epson arising out of or relating to this Agreement, Epson
branded products (hardware and including any related software), or other transaction involving you and
Epson, whether in contract, warranty, misrepresentation, fraud, tort, intentional tort, statute, regulation,
ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. "DISPUTE" DOES NOT INCLUDE IP CLAIMS, or more
specifically, a claim or cause of action for (a) trademark infringement or dilution, (b) patent infringement,
(c) copyright infringement or misuse, or (d) trade secret misappropriation (an "IP Claim"). You and Epson
also agree, notwithstanding Section 1.6,that a court, not an arbitrator, may decide if a claim or cause of
action is for an IP Claim.
1.2 Binding Arbitration. You and Epson agree that all Disputes shall be resolved by binding arbitration
according to this Agreement. ARBITRATION MEANS THAT YOU WAIVE YOUR RIGHT TO A JUDGE
OR JURY IN A COURT PROCEEDING AND YOUR GROUNDS FOR APPEAL ARE LIMITED.
Pursuant to this Agreement, binding arbitration shall be administered by JAMS, a nationally recognized
arbitration authority, pursuant to its code of procedures then in effect for consumer related disputes, but
excluding any rules that permit joinder or class actions in arbitration (for more detail on procedure, see
Section 1.6 below). You and Epson understand and agree that (a) the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C.
§1, et seq.) governs the interpretation and enforcement of this Section 1, (b) this Agreement
memorializes a transaction in interstate commerce, and (c) this Section 1 shall survive termination of this
Agreement.
1.3 Pre-Arbitration Steps and Notice. Before submitting a claim for arbitration, you and Epson agree to
try, for sixty (60) days, to resolve any Dispute informally. If Epson and you do not reach an agreement to
433
resolve the Dispute within the sixty (60) days), you or Epson may commence an arbitration. Notice to
Epson must be addressed to: Epson America, Inc., ATTN: Legal Department, 3131 Katella Ave., Los
Alamitos, CA 90720 (the "Epson Address"). The Dispute Notice to you will be sent to the most recent
address Epson has in its records for you. For this reason, it is important to notify us if your address
changes by emailing us at EAILegal@ea.epson.com or writing us at the Epson Address above. Notice of
the Dispute shall include the sender's name, address and contact information, the facts giving rise to the
Dispute, and the relief requested (the "Dispute Notice"). Following receipt of the Dispute Notice, Epson
and you agree to act in good faith to resolve the Dispute before commencing arbitration.
1.4 Small Claims Court. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may bring an individual action in the small
claims court of your state or municipality if the action is within that court's jurisdiction and is pending only
in that court.
1.5 WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND CLASS ARBITRATIONS. YOU AND EPSON AGREE THAT
EACH PARTY MAY BRING DISPUTES AGAINST THE OTHER PARTY ONLY IN AN INDIVIDUAL
CAPACITY, AND NOT AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR
REPRESENTATIVE PROCEEDING, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FEDERAL OR STATE
CLASS ACTIONS, OR CLASS ARBITRATIONS. CLASS ACTION LAWSUITS, CLASS-WIDE
ARBITRATIONS, PRIVATE ATTORNEY-GENERAL ACTIONS, AND ANY OTHER PROCEEDING
WHERE SOMEONE ACTS IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY ARE NOT ALLOWED.
ACCORDINGLY, UNDER THE ARBITRATION PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION, AN
ARBITRATOR SHALL NOT COMBINE OR CONSOLIDATE MORE THAN ONE PARTY'S CLAIMS
WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ALL AFFECTED PARTIES TO AN ARBITRATION
PROCEEDING.
1.6 Arbitration Procedure. If you or Epson commences arbitration, the arbitration shall be governed by
the rules of JAMS that are in effect when the arbitration is filed, excluding any rules that permit arbitration
on a class or representative basis (the "JAMS Rules"), available at http://www.jamsadr.com or by calling
1-800-352-5267, and under the rules set forth in this Agreement. All Disputes shall be resolved by a
single neutral arbitrator, and both parties shall have a reasonable opportunity to participate in the
selection of the arbitrator. The arbitrator is bound by the terms of this Agreement. The arbitrator, and not
any federal, state or local court or agency, shall have exclusive authority to resolve all disputes arising
out of or relating to the interpretation, applicability, enforceability or formation of this Agreement,
including any claim that all or any part of this Agreement is void or voidable. Notwithstanding this broad
delegation of authority to the arbitrator, a court may determine the limited question of whether a claim or
cause of action is for an IP Claim, which is excluded from the definition of "Disputes" in Section 1.1
above. The arbitrator shall be empowered to grant whatever relief would be available in a court under
law or in equity. The arbitrator may award you the same damages as a court could, and may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only in favor of the individual party seeking relief and only to the extent
necessary to provide relief warranted by that party's individual claim. In some instances, the costs of
arbitration can exceed the costs of litigation and the right to discovery may be more limited in arbitration
434
than in court. The arbitrator's award is binding and may be entered as a judgment in any court of
competent jurisdiction.
You may choose to engage in arbitration hearings by telephone. Arbitration hearings not conducted by
telephone shall take place in a location reasonably accessible from your primary residence, or in Orange
County, California, at your option.
a) Initiation of Arbitration Proceeding. If either you or Epson decides to arbitrate a Dispute, both parties
agree to the following procedure:
(i) Write a Demand for Arbitration. The demand must include a description of the Dispute and the amount
of damages sought to be recovered. You can find a copy of a Demand for Arbitration at
http://www.jamsadr.com ("Demand for Arbitration").
(ii) Send three copies of the Demand for Arbitration, plus the appropriate filing fee, to: JAMS, 500 North
State College Blvd., Suite 600 Orange, CA 92868, U.S.A.
(iii) Send one copy of the Demand for Arbitration to the other party (same address as the Dispute
Notice), or as otherwise agreed by the parties.
b) Hearing Format. During the arbitration, the amount of any settlement offer made shall not be disclosed
to the arbitrator until after the arbitrator determines the amount, if any, to which you or Epson is entitled.
The discovery or exchange of non-privileged information relevant to the Dispute may be allowed during
the arbitration.
c) Arbitration Fees. Epson shall pay, or (if applicable) reimburse you for, all JAMS filings and arbitrator
fees for any arbitration commenced (by you or Epson) pursuant to provisions of this Agreement.
d) Award in Your Favor. For Disputes in which you or Epson seeks $75,000 or less in damages exclusive
of attorney's fees and costs, if the arbitrator's decision results in an award to you in an amount greater
than Epson's last written offer, if any, to settle the Dispute, Epson will: (i) pay you $1,000 or the amount
of the award, whichever is greater; (ii) pay you twice the amount of your reasonable attorney's fees, if
any; and (iii) reimburse you for any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing the Dispute in arbitration. Except as
agreed upon by you and Epson in writing, the arbitrator shall determine the amount of fees, costs, and
expenses to be paid by Epson pursuant to this Section 1.6d).
e) Attorney's Fees. Epson will not seek its attorney's fees and expenses for any arbitration commenced
involving a Dispute under this Agreement. Your right to attorney's fees and expenses under Section
1.6d) above does not limit your rights to attorney's fees and expenses under applicable law;
notwithstanding the foregoing, the arbitrator may not award duplicative awards of attorney's fees and
expenses.
1.7 Opt-out. You may elect to opt-out (exclude yourself) from the final, binding, individual
arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this
Agreement by sending a written letter to the Epson Address within thirty (30) days of your assent
435
to this Agreement (including without limitation the purchase, download, installation of the
Software or other applicable use of Epson Hardware, products and services) that specifies (i)
your name, (ii) your mailing address, and (iii) your request to be excluded from the final, binding
individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in
this Section 1. In the event that you opt-out consistent with the procedure set forth above, all
other terms shall continue to apply, including the requirement to provide notice prior to litigation.
1.8 Amendments to Section 1. Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, you
and Epson agree that if Epson makes any future amendments to the dispute resolution procedure and
class action waiver provisions (other than a change to Epson's address) in this Agreement, Epson will
obtain your affirmative assent to the applicable amendment. If you do not affirmatively assent to the
applicable amendment, you are agreeing that you will arbitrate any Dispute between the parties in
accordance with the language of this Section 1 (or resolve disputes as provided for in Section 1.7, if you
timely elected to opt-out when you first assented to this Agreement).
1.9 Severability. If any provision in this Section 1 is found to be unenforceable, that provision shall be
severed with the remainder of this Agreement remaining in full force and effect. The foregoing shall not
apply to the prohibition against class or representative actions as provided in Section 1.5. This
means that if Section 1.5 is found to be unenforceable, the entire Section 1 (but only Section 1)
shall be null and void.
Trademarks
EPSON® is a registered trademark, EPSON Exceed Your Vision is a registered logomark, and Epson
ConnectTM is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Remote PrintTM is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac, macOS, OS X, AirPrint, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and App Store are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically
with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
Google® is a registered trademark and AndroidTM, ChromebookTM, GmailTM, Google ChromeTM, and
Google PlayTM are trademarks of Google LLC.
Wi-Fi Direct® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
436
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. The information contained herein is
designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as
applied to other products.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third
parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of:
accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this
product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and
maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any
options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson
Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic
interference that occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson
approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
This information is subject to change without notice.
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
Copyright Attribution
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment

Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
437
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose
is hereby granted without fee, provided that (I) the above copyright notices and this permission notice
appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and
Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the
specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials

Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any
Epson product. While some countries' laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in
certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume. Contact your
legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law.
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products

This product will enter sleep mode after a period of nonuse. This is to ensure that the product meets
Energy Star standards of energy efficiency. More energy savings can be achieved by setting the time to
sleep to a shorter interval.
Copyright Attribution
© 2023 Epson America, Inc.
1/23
CPD-62460
438

WFC 5810

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

WFC 5810

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WFC 5810

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WF-C5810/WF-C5890 User's Guide

Note: Availability of products in this guide varies by country.

Installing or Using Optional Parts

Installing or Using Optional Parts

Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts

Option or part Part number

Parent topic: Installing or Using Optional Parts

Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units

4. Remove the protective piece from the back of the printer.

1. Do one of the following:

3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get.

1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences.

Product Parts Locations

1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) cover (F)

1 Paper tray cover

Parent topic: Product Parts Locations

Product Parts - Inside

1 Scanner unit (J)

Parent topic: Product Parts Locations

Product Parts - Back

Parent topic: Product Parts Locations

Using the Control Panel

Control Panel Buttons and Lights

Status Icon Information

The indicated setting has changed.

Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights

Selecting the Date and Time

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

Selecting Your Country or Region

Entering Characters on the LCD Screen

• To move the cursor, select the left or right arrows.

• To change the case of letters, select .

• To delete the previous character, select .

• To enter numbers or symbols, select .

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

Note: You can save up to 50 presets.

4. Select the function for which you want to set up a preset.

Changing LCD Screen Language

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

Adjusting Control Panel Sounds

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

5. Select Button Press.

Parent topic: Using the Control Panel

Adjusting the Screen Brightness

Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

Checking for Software Updates

Using Power Saving Settings

Changing the Sleep Timer Settings

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

Note: Enter the administrator password, if necessary.

3. Do one of the following:

Changing the Power Off Timer Settings

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More

Print from anywhere with these Epson Connect solutions:

Setting Up Epson Connect Services

Using Epson Email Print